Chevrolet 2006 manuel d'utilisation

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586

Aller à la page of

Un bon manuel d’utilisation

Les règles imposent au revendeur l'obligation de fournir à l'acheteur, avec des marchandises, le manuel d’utilisation Chevrolet 2006. Le manque du manuel d’utilisation ou les informations incorrectes fournies au consommateur sont à la base d'une plainte pour non-conformité du dispositif avec le contrat. Conformément à la loi, l’inclusion du manuel d’utilisation sous une forme autre que le papier est autorisée, ce qui est souvent utilisé récemment, en incluant la forme graphique ou électronique du manuel Chevrolet 2006 ou les vidéos d'instruction pour les utilisateurs. La condition est son caractère lisible et compréhensible.

Qu'est ce que le manuel d’utilisation?

Le mot vient du latin "Instructio", à savoir organiser. Ainsi, le manuel d’utilisation Chevrolet 2006 décrit les étapes de la procédure. Le but du manuel d’utilisation est d’instruire, de faciliter le démarrage, l'utilisation de l'équipement ou l'exécution des actions spécifiques. Le manuel d’utilisation est une collection d'informations sur l'objet/service, une indice.

Malheureusement, peu d'utilisateurs prennent le temps de lire le manuel d’utilisation, et un bon manuel permet non seulement d’apprendre à connaître un certain nombre de fonctionnalités supplémentaires du dispositif acheté, mais aussi éviter la majorité des défaillances.

Donc, ce qui devrait contenir le manuel parfait?

Tout d'abord, le manuel d’utilisation Chevrolet 2006 devrait contenir:
- informations sur les caractéristiques techniques du dispositif Chevrolet 2006
- nom du fabricant et année de fabrication Chevrolet 2006
- instructions d'utilisation, de réglage et d’entretien de l'équipement Chevrolet 2006
- signes de sécurité et attestations confirmant la conformité avec les normes pertinentes

Pourquoi nous ne lisons pas les manuels d’utilisation?

Habituellement, cela est dû au manque de temps et de certitude quant à la fonctionnalité spécifique de l'équipement acheté. Malheureusement, la connexion et le démarrage Chevrolet 2006 ne suffisent pas. Le manuel d’utilisation contient un certain nombre de lignes directrices concernant les fonctionnalités spécifiques, la sécurité, les méthodes d'entretien (même les moyens qui doivent être utilisés), les défauts possibles Chevrolet 2006 et les moyens de résoudre des problèmes communs lors de l'utilisation. Enfin, le manuel contient les coordonnées du service Chevrolet en l'absence de l'efficacité des solutions proposées. Actuellement, les manuels d’utilisation sous la forme d'animations intéressantes et de vidéos pédagogiques qui sont meilleurs que la brochure, sont très populaires. Ce type de manuel permet à l'utilisateur de voir toute la vidéo d'instruction sans sauter les spécifications et les descriptions techniques compliquées Chevrolet 2006, comme c’est le cas pour la version papier.

Pourquoi lire le manuel d’utilisation?

Tout d'abord, il contient la réponse sur la structure, les possibilités du dispositif Chevrolet 2006, l'utilisation de divers accessoires et une gamme d'informations pour profiter pleinement de toutes les fonctionnalités et commodités.

Après un achat réussi de l’équipement/dispositif, prenez un moment pour vous familiariser avec toutes les parties du manuel d'utilisation Chevrolet 2006. À l'heure actuelle, ils sont soigneusement préparés et traduits pour qu'ils soient non seulement compréhensibles pour les utilisateurs, mais pour qu’ils remplissent leur fonction de base de l'information et d’aide.

Table des matières du manuel d’utilisation

  • Page 1

    Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1 - 1 Front Seats ............................................... 1 - 3 Rear Seats ............................................... 1 - 9 Safety Belts ............................................. 1-12 Child Restraints ....................................... 1-31 Airbag System ......................................... 1-70 Restraint System Check ............................ 1-87 Features and Controls ..................................... 2 - 1 Keys ........................................................ 2 - 3 Doors and Locks ....................................... 2 - 8 Windows ................................................. 2-15 Thef[...]

  • Page 2

    GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the names SILVERADO and Z71 are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual. Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is sold, leave this manual in it the vehicle. Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from yo[...]

  • Page 3

    Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. { CAUTION: These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not, you or others could be hurt. You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Do Not,” “Do Not do this” or “Do Not let this happen.” iii[...]

  • Page 4

    Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this manual you will find these notices: Notice: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text desc[...]

  • Page 5

    These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle: v[...]

  • Page 6

    ✍ NOTES vi[...]

  • Page 7

    Front Seats ..................................................... .1-3 Manual Seats ............................................... .1-3 Power Seats ................................................. .1-4 Power Lumbar .............................................. .1-4 Heated Seats ................................................ .1-5 Reclining Seatbacks ....................................... .1-6 Head Restraints ............................................ .1-8 Seatback Latches .......................................... .1-8 Rear Seats ...................................................... .1-9 Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) ............... .1-9 Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) ..........[...]

  • Page 8

    Airbag System .............................................. .1-70 Where Are the Airbags? ............................... .1-71 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... .1-73 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... .1-75 How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... .1-75 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... .1-76 Airbag Off Switch ......................................... .1-77 Passenger Sensing System ........................... .1-80 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... .1-86 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ................................................... .1-86 Restraint System Check ............................[...]

  • Page 9

    Front Seats Manual Seats { CAUTION: You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. If your vehicle has a manual bucket or a split bench seat, you can adjust the seat forward or rearward with the bar located under the front of the seat cushion. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. 1-3[...]

  • Page 10

    Power Seats If your vehicle has power seats, the controls are located on the outboard side of the seats. • Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by raising or lowering the front of the horizontal control. • Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by raising or lowering the rear of the horizontal control. • Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by raising or lowering the whole horizontal control. • Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the horizontal control forward or rearward. If your vehicle has power reclining seatbacks, the control is located rear of the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats. Adjust the angle of the seatback by pressing the vertic[...]

  • Page 11

    Heated Seats If your vehicle has this feature, the buttons are located on the front doors. The engine must be running for the heated seats to work. To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with the heated seat and seatback symbol. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium and low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator lights will be lit to designate the level of heat selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low. To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button with the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on the seatback button will be lit to designate that only the seatback is being heated. Additional presses of the sea[...]

  • Page 12

    Reclining Seatbacks { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. To adjust the seatback, lift the manual lever located on the outboard side of the seat. Release the lever to lock the seatback in the desired position. Lift the lever again without pushing on the seatback and the seatback will go to an upright position. 1-6[...]

  • Page 13

    If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner, see Power Seats on page 1-4 for further information on how to operate the reclining seatback feature. { CAUTION: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the[...]

  • Page 14

    Head Restraints Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Push the head restraint down to lower it. Your rear seats may have head restraints that can be adjusted up and down. Seatback Latches The front seatbacks fold forward to allow access to the rear of the cab. To fold the seatback forward, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to [...]

  • Page 15

    Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) Folding the Rear Seat The rear seat in the extended cab can be folded up to provide more cargo space. To fold the seat up, do the following: 1. Push down on the front of the seat cushion while pulling down on the release strap which is located under the seat cushion. 2. Pull the seat cushion up until it latches with the seatback. 3. After latching the seat cushion up, pull forward on it to make sure it is locked. The seat can also be folded down for more seating space. To fold the seat down, do the following: 1. Push the seat cushion while pulling the release strap which is located under the seat cushion. Pull the seat cushion down until it latch[...]

  • Page 16

    Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) The second row seat is a 60/40 split seat. Either side of the rear seat may be flipped and folded for added cargo space. Make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat and that the head restraints are completely lowered. To flip and fold the seat, do the following: 1. Pull up on the strap loop at the rear of the seat cushion. Then, pull the seat cushion up and flip it forward. 2. After folding the seat cushion fully forward, pull the seatback forward until it is flat. If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with the cushion, try moving the front seat forward and/or bringing the front seat more upright. The lever at the base of the s[...]

  • Page 17

    To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the following: 1. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all the way. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked into place. 3. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position. Pull up on the cushion to make sure it is locked into place. { CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be ser[...]

  • Page 18

    Safety Belts Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. { CAUTION: Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. { CAUTION: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outs[...]

  • Page 19

    You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter...a lot! Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. 1-13[...]

  • Page 20

    Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. 1-14[...]

  • Page 21

    The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... or the instrument panel... 1-15[...]

  • Page 22

    or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Airbags are in ma[...]

  • Page 23

    Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an accident — even one that is not your fault — you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rul[...]

  • Page 24

    4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-30 . Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries[...]

  • Page 25

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. 1-19[...]

  • Page 26

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. 1-20[...]

  • Page 27

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is over an armrest. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests. 1-21[...]

  • Page 28

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. 1-22[...]

  • Page 29

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is twisted across the body. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it. 1-23[...]

  • Page 30

    To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the [...]

  • Page 31

    Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-17 . The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature which may turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens unintentionally, just let the belt go back all the way and start again. Center Front Passenger Position Lap Belt If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sit in the center position. When you sit in the center front seating position, you have a l[...]

  • Page 32

    To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-30 . Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. Rear Seat Passengers It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in[...]

  • Page 33

    Lap-Shoulder Belt All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-30 . Make sure the release button on the[...]

  • Page 34

    The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, [...]

  • Page 35

    Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear seat comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head. There is one guide for each outside passenger in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt: 1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body. 2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The guide must be on top of the belt. 1-29[...]

  • Page 36

    { CAUTION: A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-26 . Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use i[...]

  • Page 37

    Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buck[...]

  • Page 38

    { CAUTION: Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can not properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time. Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window, move the child toward the center of the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on page 1-29 . If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position, move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the[...]

  • Page 39

    { CAUTION: Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size [...]

  • Page 40

    { CAUTION: People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint. 1-34[...]

  • Page 41

    { CAUTION: Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. 1-35[...]

  • Page 42

    Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s inst[...]

  • Page 43

    { CAUTION: The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints. Child Restraint Systems An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or p[...]

  • Page 44

    A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. 1-38[...]

  • Page 45

    A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window. Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint? A: A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position children. A built-in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a portable one, which is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Wit[...]

  • Page 46

    Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in the Vehicle { CAUTION: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 for more [...]

  • Page 47

    Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint There are several systems for securing the child within the child restraint. One system, the three-point harness, has straps that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side. { CAUTION: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if th[...]

  • Page 48

    Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Your vehicle may have a label on your sun visor that says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless your vehicle has the passenger sensing system or an airbag o[...]

  • Page 49

    CAUTION: (Continued) If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. { CAUTION: A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat. Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position. The restraints will not work properly. There is limited space in the rear seating area of an extended cab model. If you want to secure a [...]

  • Page 50

    Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower ancho[...]

  • Page 51

    Top Tether Anchor A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that for[...]

  • Page 52

    Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. Do not install a child restraint in the center seat position. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position on page 1-56 for more information. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. Regular Cab — Bucket Regular Cab — Bench Extended Cab Crew Cab 1-46[...]

  • Page 53

    For crew cab models, the rear passenger side and center seating positions have exposed metal lower anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. For extended cab models, the rear outboard seating positions have exposed metal lower anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. For regular and crew cab models, there is an anchor symbol on the trim covers to assist you in locating the top tether anchors. For regular cab models with a bench seat, the top tether anchors are located under trim covers on the back panel behind the center and passenger seats. Do not install a child restraint in the center seat position. See Securing a Child Restra[...]

  • Page 54

    For extended cab models, the top tether anchors are located near the top of the seatback for each rear seating position. In addition to the top tether anchors, each seating position has a fabric loop at the top of the seatback that you will use to route the top tether through. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. For crew cab models, there are covered top tether anchors for each seating position located on the back panel of your vehicle, behind the rear seat. Remove the trim covers to access the anchors. Do not secure a child restraint in the front passenger’s position if your vehicle has rear sea[...]

  • Page 55

    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System { CAUTION: If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. { CAUTION: Each top[...]

  • Page 56

    Regular Cab Models 1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 1.1. Pull the passenger seatback forward by pulling the recliner handle upward to access the top tether anchor. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6 for additional information. 1.2. Find the top tether anchor. 1.3. Remove the trim cover to expose the anchor. 1.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions: If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are us[...]

  • Page 57

    2. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Regular and Extended Cab) (With Airbag Off Switch) on page 1-60 or Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Regular and Extended Cab) (With Passenger Sensing System) on page 1-65 for instructions on installing the child restraint using the safety belts. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in dif ferent directions to be sure it is secure. Extended Cab Models 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. [...]

  • Page 58

    2.2. When using a child restraint with a top tether in the rear passenger position, raise the head restraint and route the top tether through the fabric loop. Then, attach the top tether to the metal anchor point at the center rear seating position. 2.3. When using a child restraint with a top tether in the rear center position, route the top tether through the fabric loop. Then, raise the head restraint on the passenger side and attach the top tether to the metal anchor point located at the rear passenger position. 2.4. Tighten the top tether when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions say. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in dif ferent directions to be sure it is secu[...]

  • Page 59

    If the position you are using does not have a head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the head restraint. If the position you are using has an adjustable head restraint and you are using a single tether, raise the head restraint and route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts. 1.4. Remove the trim cover to expose the top tether anchor. 1.5. Attach the top tether attachment to the top tether anchor. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That [...]

  • Page 60

    Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position Extended Cab and Crew Cab There is limited space in the rear seating of an extended cab model. If you want to secure a child restraint in a rear seating position, be sure to study the instructions that came with your child restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your seat properly. If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 . If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the chil[...]

  • Page 61

    4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 1-55[...]

  • Page 62

    6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends using a top tether, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 . 7. Push and pull the restraint in dif ferent directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position { CAUTION: A child in a chil[...]

  • Page 63

    Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Crew Cab) Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat. Here is why: { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat position, see Where to Put the R[...]

  • Page 64

    4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 1-58[...]

  • Page 65

    6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more of the belt out of the retractor once the lock has been set. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in dif ferent directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adu[...]

  • Page 66

    Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Regular and Extended Cab) (With Airbag Of f Switch) Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. If your instrument panel has one of the switches pictured in the following illustrations, your vehicle has an airbag off switch that you can use to turn of f the right front passenger’s airbag. Your switch may vary slightly. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-77 for more on this, including important safety information and illustrations of alternate switch designs. { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing ch[...]

  • Page 67

    Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat unless the airbag is off. Here is why: { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off before using a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat position. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the right front passenger seat as far back as it will go. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint. See Where to Put the [...]

  • Page 68

    If your vehicle has a rear seat, there is no top tether anchor at the right front seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 if the child restraint has a top tether. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s fr[...]

  • Page 69

    5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder belt to tighten the lap belt portion and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more of the belt out of the retractor once the lock has been set. 1-63[...]

  • Page 70

    7. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends using a top tether, and the position you are using has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 . 8. Push and pull the child restraint in dif ferent directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. If you had turned the air[...]

  • Page 71

    Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Regular and Extended Cab) (With Passenger Sensing System) Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 . If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-80 and Passeng[...]

  • Page 72

    Your vehicle may have a label on your sun visor that says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circum[...]

  • Page 73

    If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat position, move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-4 or Manual Seats on page 1-3 . If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-44 . If your vehicle has a rear seat, there is no top tether anchor at the right front seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Te[...]

  • Page 74

    4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 1-68[...]

  • Page 75

    6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the lock has been set. 7. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends using a top tether, and the position you are using has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower Anc[...]

  • Page 76

    Airbag System Your vehicle has an airbag for the driver and an airbag for the right front passenger. Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations. Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: { CAUTION: You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. A[...]

  • Page 77

    { CAUTION: Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 1-31 and Infants and Young Children on page 1-33 . There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for mal[...]

  • Page 78

    The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. { CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. 1-72[...]

  • Page 79

    When Should an Airbag Inflate? The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows [...]

  • Page 80

    Single Stage vs. Dual Stage Airbags Depending on the weight of your vehicle you will have either “Single Stage Airbags” or “Dual Stage Airbags”. Vehicles that have a passenger sensing system also have dual stage airbags. If the rearview mirror in your vehicle has a passenger airbag status indicator printed on it, your vehicle has the passenger sensing system and therefore, it has dual stage airbags. If the rearview mirror in your vehicle does not have a passenger airbag status indicator printed on it, then your vehicle does not have the passenger sensing system and it has single stage airbags. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-36 or Passenger Sensing System on page 1-80[...]

  • Page 81

    Single Stage Airbags If your vehicle has frontal airbags with single stage deployment and your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or deform, the threshold level is about 13 to 16 mph (20 to 25 km/h). (The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range.) What Makes an Airbag Inflate? In an impact of suff icient severity, the airbag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument p[...]

  • Page 82

    What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s airbag or the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag — may be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle. { CAUTION:[...]

  • Page 83

    Airbag Of f Switch If your instrument panel has one of the switches pictured in the following illustrations your vehicle has an airbag off switch that you can use to turn of f the right front passenger’s airbag. This switch should only be turned to the off position if the person in the right front passenger’s position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows: Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: • my vehicle has no rear seat; • my vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or • the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes[...]

  • Page 84

    Medical Condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician: • causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and • makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash. { CAUTION: If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Do not [...]

  • Page 85

    The airbag off light will come on to let you know that the right front passenger’s airbag is off. The light will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. The right front passenger’s airbag will remain off until you turn it back on. { CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the airbag, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. The right front passenger’s airbag could inflate even though the switch is off. If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup or an extended cab pickup and this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in the right front pas[...]

  • Page 86

    Passenger Sensing System If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The indicator will be visible when you turn your ignition key to RUN or START. The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will be visible on the rearview mirror during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-36 . If your rearview mirror does not have either of the indicators pictured below, then your vehicle does not have the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensin[...]

  • Page 87

    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag status indicator shows off. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the airbag is off. Your vehicle may have a label on your sun visor that says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is be[...]

  • Page 88

    Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat the unless passenger airbag status indicator shows off. Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the airbag is off. Here is why: { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off before using a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat position. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to t[...]

  • Page 89

    The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if: • the right front passenger seat is unoccupied • the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant seat • the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing child restraint • the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat • a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time • the right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints • or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When [...]

  • Page 90

    If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s airbag. 1-84[...]

  • Page 91

    { CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger’s seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33 for more on this, including important safety information. Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. You may want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Y[...]

  • Page 92

    Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14 . { CAUTION: For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are[...]

  • Page 93

    Q: What if I added a snow plow? Will it keep the airbags from working properly? A: We have designed our airbag systems to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including snow plowing with vehicles equipped with the optional Snow Plow Prep Package (RPO VYU). But do not change or defeat the snow plow’s “tripping mechanism.” If you do, it can damage your snow plow and your vehicle, and it may cause an airbag inflation. Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this will affect my advanced airbag system? A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module (located under t[...]

  • Page 94

    Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash { CAUTION: A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH system parts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new parts. If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash, you[...]

  • Page 95

    Keys .............................................................. .2-3 Remote Keyless Entry System ........................ .2-4 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation .......... .2-5 Doors and Locks ............................................ .2-8 Door Locks ................................................... .2-8 Power Door Locks ......................................... .2-8 Delayed Locking ............................................ .2-9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. .2-10 Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) ............ .2-12 Lockout Protection ....................................... .2-12 Rear Doors ................................................. .2-13 Tailgate .[...]

  • Page 96

    Mirrors .......................................................... .2-56 Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ .2-56 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar ® and Compass .............................. .2-56 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar ® , Compass and Temperature Display ................................................... .2-58 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass ................................................ .2-60 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display ............. .2-62 Outside Manual Mirrors ................................. .2-64 Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ........................ .2-65 Outside Wes[...]

  • Page 97

    Keys { CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The children or others could be badly injured or even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. 2-3[...]

  • Page 98

    Your vehicle has one double-sided key for the ignition and all door locks as well as the spare tire hoist lock, if equipped. If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining replacements. Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 . If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar ® system with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle, OnStar ® may be able to send a command to unlock your vehicle. See OnStar ® System on page 2[...]

  • Page 99

    At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: • Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. • Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery Replacement” and “Resynchronization” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-5 . • [...]

  • Page 100

    Q (Lock): Press this button once to lock all of the doors. Pressing lock again within three seconds may cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation. You can choose different feedback options for each press of the lock button. See “Lock Feedback” and “Unlock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-64 for more information. L (Panic): Press this button to sound the horn and flash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds. Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again, by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle. Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your[...]

  • Page 101

    To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter, do the following: 1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slot between the covers of the transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove the bottom by twisting the coin. 2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up. 3. Align the covers and snap them together. 4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See “Resynchronization” following this information. 5. Check the operation of the transmitter. Resynchronization Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by this system. The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receive[...]

  • Page 102

    Doors and Locks Door Locks { CAUTION: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. • Passengers — especially children — can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive. • Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. • Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down [...]

  • Page 103

    If your vehicle has this power door lock switch, press the bottom of the switch on either front door to lock all the doors at once. Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors at once. The power door locks will operate at any time even when the ignition is off. The power door locks will also automatically lock when the vehicle is out of PARK (P), or for manual transmission, when the vehicle reaches 8 mph (24 km/h). Operating the power locks may interact with the theft-deterrent system, if equipped. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-18 . Delayed Locking If your vehicle is a crew cab, it may be equipped with this feature. When locking the doors with the power lock switch or the key[...]

  • Page 104

    Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle may be equipped with an automatic lock/unlock feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s power door locks. You can program this feature through the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following method. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-64 . Programmable Locking Feature Following are the two available programming options: Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted into gear. This is the mode that is pre-programmed in the factory for your vehicle for automatic transmission vehicles. Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is greater than 8 mph (13 km/h). This is the mode that is pre-programmed in the fact[...]

  • Page 105

    Programmable Unlocking Feature The following is the list of available programming options: Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), for automatic transmission vehicles only. Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is shifted into PARK (P), for automatic transmission vehicles only. This is the mode that is pre-programmed in the factory for your vehicle. Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed from the ignition. This is the mode that is pre-programmed in the factory for manual transmission vehicles. Mode 4: No automatic door unlock. The following instructions tell you how to change the automatic door unlock mode (automatic transmission onl[...]

  • Page 106

    Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) With this feature, you can lock the rear side doors so that they cannot be opened from the inside by passengers. This feature is located on the inside edge of the rear doors. To use one of the locks do the following: 1. Open one of the rear doors. 2. To engage the rear door security lock, move the lever forward. 3. To disengage the lock, move the lever rearward. 4. Close the door. 5. Do the same thing to the other rear door. The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to open the rear door while the security lock is engaged, unlock the door and open the door from the outside. Lockout Protection T[...]

  • Page 107

    Rear Doors Extended Cab Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear access door(s) that allows easier access to the rear area of the extended cab. To open a rear access door from the outside, first open the front door. Then, use the handle located on the front edge of the rear access door to open it. You must fully close a rear access door before you can close the front door. To open a rear access door from the inside, the front door must be opened first. Then, use the handle located on the inside of the rear access door to open it. Crew Cabs If your vehicle is a crew cab, you can open your doors from the inside or outside. Your vehicle may also have a feature which prevents children from ope[...]

  • Page 108

    Tailgate You can open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you. To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latches. After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back towards you to be sure it latches securely. Tailgate Removal The tailgate on your vehicle can be removed to allow for different loading situations. Although the tailgate can be removed without assistance, you may want someone to assist you with the removal to avoid possible damage to the vehicle. To remove the tailgate, do the following: 1. Raise the tailgate slightly and release both retaining cable clips. To release the retaining cable clips, lift the cable so it points straight [...]

  • Page 109

    Windows { CAUTION: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. Manual Windows Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or lower the manual windows. 2-15[...]

  • Page 110

    Power Windows If your vehicle is equipped with power windows, the controls are located on each of the side doors in the front and rear for crew cab models. The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger’s and rear windows as well, if equipped. Your power windows will work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 . Press the switch down to lower the window. Pull up the front of the switch to raise the window. Express Down Windows The driver and front passenger windows also have an express down feature that allows the windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press down [...]

  • Page 111

    Swing-Out Windows Your vehicle may have swing-out windows. To open a rear swing-out window, flip the latch open and swing the glass out. The latch will catch when the window is fully open and it will also hold it in the open position. Sliding Rear Window If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latch in the center of the window and slide the glass to open it. When you close the window, be sure the latch is engaged. The sliding rear window does not have rear defogger. Sun Visors Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the side window. The passenger’s side sun visor may have a vanity mirror. 2-17[...]

  • Page 112

    Theft-Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. Content Theft-Deterrent Your vehicle may be equipped with a content theft-deterrent alarm system. The security light is located on the instrument panel cluster. See Security Light on page 3-48 for additional information. To activate the theft-deterrent system, do the following: 1. Close all the doors. 2. Lock the door with the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security light should come on and flash. If the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, but a d[...]

  • Page 113

    If you set off the alarm by accident, turn of f the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START. Testing the Alarm The alarm can be tested by following these steps: 1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by locking the doors with the remote keyless entry transmitter. 2. Wait for the security light to go out. 3. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door. This should set off the alarm. 4. Turn of f the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START. If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the vehicl[...]

  • Page 114

    Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break-In Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: • Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). • Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle. • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every [...]

  • Page 115

    A (Lock): This position locks your ignition when the key is removed. The steering locks when equipped with a manual transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK B (Accessory): This position allows you to use things like the radio, power windows and the windshield wipers when the engine is off. { CAUTION: On manual transmission vehicles, turning the key to LOCK will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to ACCESSORY. Do not press the key release button while the ve[...]

  • Page 116

    Retained Accessory Power (RAP) If the vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP), certain features will continue to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to LOCK unless a door is opened. Starting the Engine Your vehicle is equipped with Starter Motor Control. This feature assists in starting the engine and protects the electrical system. This feature may cause the engine to crank even after the ignition key is not in START Automatic Transmission Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in any other position — that is a safety feature. To restart when you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. If you have a diesel engine refer t[...]

  • Page 117

    When starting your engine in very cold weather (below 0°F or − 18°C), do this: 1. With your foot of f the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START and hold it there up to 15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of the key. 2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra g[...]

  • Page 118

    3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. { CAUTION: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil[...]

  • Page 119

    PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle cannot move easily. If your vehicle has the Allison Transmission ® , with the Power Takeoff (PTO), use PARK (P) when starting. The Allison Transmission ® has a park pawl that is designed to hold the weight of commercial medium duty trucks. Therefore, the Allison Transmission ® uses larger parts than other automatic transmissions. These larger parts may sometimes make a clunk noise when the selector lever is moved from DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) to PARK (P). This is normal and there is no damage occurring during these shifts. When parked on a hill, especially when lo[...]

  • Page 120

    { CAUTION: If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to roll — even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) — not in NEUTRAL. See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-50 . REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. If your vehicle has the Allison Transmission ® , the R on the shift display, may blink if the shift inhibitor is active. Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) onl[...]

  • Page 121

    DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you are: • Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down. • Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next gear and has more power. DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving. You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often. If your vehicle has the Allison Transmission ® , it will shift into first range when DRIVE (D) is select[...]

  • Page 122

    SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. If you manually select SECOND (2) in an automatic transmission, the transmission will start in second gear. You may use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces. FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is[...]

  • Page 123

    To use this feature, do the following: 1. Move the shift lever to the MANUAL MODE (M). When in the MANUAL MODE, the transmission’s current gear range will be the highest attainable range with all the lower gears available. 2. Press the plus/minus buttons to upshift or downshift selecting the desired range of gears for your current driving conditions. The Range Selection Mode allows you to control the vehicle’s engine and vehicle speed while driving down hill by allowing you to select a desired gear. The DIC shows the six available ranges with the highest attainable range shown in brackets. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-51 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-52 for mo[...]

  • Page 124

    Tow/Haul Mode If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, it may have a Tow/Haul mode. If your vehicle has an Allison Transmission ® see “Tow/Haul Mode (Allison Transmission ® ) following. Tow/Haul mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing increased performance, vehicle control, and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy loads. The selector button is located on the end of the shift lever. Turn the Turn Tow/Haul on and off by pressing the button. When the Tow/Haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 3-49 for more information. If your vehicle is equipped with the Performance Package-[...]

  • Page 125

    The selector button is located on the end of the shift lever. Turn the Turn Tow/Haul on and off by pressing the button. When the Tow/Haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 3-49 for more information. Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-67 for more information. Grade Braking and Cruise Grade Braking (Allison Transmission ® ) Grade Braking and Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade. It maintains the vehicle’s speed by automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces wear on the brakes system and increases control of[...]

  • Page 126

    Manual Transmission Operation Five-Speed (VORTEC™ 6.0L V8 Engine) Here is how to operate your transmission. FIRST (1) is intended only for heavy loads or trailer towing and is not recommended for normal driving. During the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle use, start your vehicle moving in FIRST (1). This allows clutch components to break-in properly. FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. Shift into FIRST (1) only when the vehicle is below 5 mph (8 km/h). If you try to shift down into FIRST (1) at excessive vehicle speeds, the shift lever will not move into FIRST (1) until vehicle speed is [...]

  • Page 127

    REVERSE (R): To back up, first press down the clutch pedal. Wait for the vehicle to stop moving and then, shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle. Five-Speed (VORTEC™ 4.3L V6 and 4.8L V8 Engines) Here is how to operate your transmission: FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the c[...]

  • Page 128

    Six-Speed (VORTEC™ 8.1L V8 and DURAMAX ® ™ 6.6L V8 Engines) Here is how to operate your transmission. This six-speed pattern is unique to GM manual transmissions. The transmission always repositions the shift lever to NEUTRAL, which is located between FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) gear. To prevent unintentional gear selections, additional force is required to move the shift lever into REVERSE (R) or FIRST (1). Use FIRST (1) when trailer towing, driving with payload in the pickup box or launching on a grade. Otherwise, start in SECOND (2) gear. Only shift into FIRST (1) when the vehicle has stopped moving. During the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle use, start the vehicle moving in FIRST [...]

  • Page 129

    FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6): Upshift into the higher forward gears the same way as you do THIRD (3). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal. NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle your engine. REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal. Wait for the vehicle to stop moving and then, shift to REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal. Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, when turning off your engine and parking your vehicle. Shift Speeds { CAUTION: If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could lose control of your vehicle. You could injure yourself or others. Do not shift down more than[...]

  • Page 130

    Up-Shift Light If you have a manual transmission, you may have a shift light. This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for best fuel economy. When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather, road and traff ic conditions allow. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift when the light comes on. While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator. If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped with a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when the transfer case is in Four-Wheel Low. Ignore the shift light when you downshift. Four-Wheel Drive If your veh[...]

  • Page 131

    Manual Transfer Case The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of the driver. Use this lever to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. A 4WD indicator light comes on when you shift into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages. See Four-Wheel-Drive Light on page 3-49 . Some delay between shifting and when the indicator light comes on is normal. Recommended Transfer Case Settings Driving Conditions Transfer Case Settings 2H 4H 4L N Normal YES Severe YES Extreme YES Vehicle in Tow* YES *See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-62 or Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-61 for further information. 2-37[...]

  • Page 132

    An indicator light near the lever shows you the transfer case settings: Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in four-wheel drive for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in four-wheel drive for extended periods of time. 4L (Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never need 4L. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose 4L if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills. When operating in Four-Wheel Low, the gear ratio provides additional torque when compared to four-wheel high. [...]

  • Page 133

    When Using the Manual Transfer Case • Shifting should be made using quick motions. Shifting slowly may make it more diff icult to shift. • You may notice that it is harder to shift when the vehicle is cold. After the vehicle warms up the shifting will return to normal. • While in 4H or 4L you may experience reduced fuel economy. • Avoid driving in four-wheel drive on clean, dry pavement. It may cause your tires to wear faster, and make your transfer case harder to shift and run noisier. Shifting from 2H (Two-Wheel High) to 4H (Four-Wheel High) • Shifts between 2H and 4H can be made at any vehicle speed. • It is easiest to shift the transfer case when maintaining a constant speed [...]

  • Page 134

    Shifting In or Out of NEUTRAL 1. With the vehicle running and the engine at an idle set the parking brake. 2. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL (N). Shift the transfer case in one continuous motion into or out of the NEUTRAL position. Automatic Transfer Case The transfer case buttons are located to the left of the instrument panel cluster. Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. Recommended Transfer Case Settings Driving Conditions Transfer Case Settings 2 m AUTO 4WD 4 m 4 n N Normal YES Variable YES Severe YES Extreme YES Vehicle in Tow* YES *See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-62 for further information. You can choose among four driving settings: Notice: Driv[...]

  • Page 135

    AUTO 4WD (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in Automatic Four-Wheel Drive, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle detects a loss of traction, the system will automatically engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than Two-Wheel High. 2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the best fuel economy. { CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your v[...]

  • Page 136

    Shifting into Four-Wheel High or AUTO 4WD (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive) Press and release the four-wheel high or AUTO 4WD switch. This can be done at any speed, except when shifting from Four-Wheel Low, and the indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is completed. Shifting into Two-Wheel High Press and release the Two-Wheel High switch. This can be done at any speed, except when shifting from Four-Wheel Low. Shifting into Four-Wheel Low Notice: Shifting the transfer case into Four-Wheel Low while moving at speeds faster than 3 mph (5 km/h) may cause premature wear to the transfer case, and may cause the gears to grind. To avoid causing premature wear, and [...]

  • Page 137

    Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Low To shift from Four-Wheel Low to Four-Wheel High, AUTO 4WD, or Two-Wheel High, your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the Four-Wheel High, AUTO 4WD, or Two-Wheel High switch. You must wait for the Four-Wheel High, AUTO 4WD, or Two-Wheel High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting your transmission into gear. Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four-Wheel Low indicator light has stopped flashing could[...]

  • Page 138

    4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). 5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High. 6. Simultaneously press and hold the Two-Wheel High and Four-Wheel Low buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL is complete. 7. If the engine is running, shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second, or FIRST (1) for vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. 8. Turn the engine of f, by turning the key to ACCESSORY. 9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P). 10. Turn the ignition to LOCK. Shifting Out of NEUTRAL To shift out of NEUTRAL: 1. Set the parking brake and apply the [...]

  • Page 139

    Electronic Transfer Case If your four-wheel-drive vehicle has the electronic transfer case, the transfer case switches are located to the left of the instrument panel cluster. Recommended Transfer Case Settings Driving Conditions Transfer Case Settings 2 m 4 m 4 n N Normal YES Severe YES Extreme YES Vehicle in Tow* YES *See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-62 or Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-61 for further information. Use these switches to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. You can choose among three driving settings: 2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. { CAUTION: Shifting the t[...]

  • Page 140

    4 m (Four-Wheel High): This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use four-wheel high when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-road situations. 4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra traction. You may never need Four-Wheel Low. It sends the maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel Low if you were driving off-road in sand, mud or deep snow and while climbing or descending steep hills. When operating in Four-Wheel Low, the gear ratio provides additional torque when compared to Four-Wheel High. The transmission gear shift feel will be exaggerated. Indicator lights in the swit[...]

  • Page 141

    Shifting from Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High to Four-Wheel Low Notice: Shifting the transfer case into Four-Wheel Low while moving at speeds faster than 3 mph (5 km/h) may cause premature wear to the transfer case, and may cause the gears to grind. To avoid causing premature wear, and grinding the gears, do not shift the transfer case into Four-Wheel Low while the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h). To shift from Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High to Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) for an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal pressed for a manual transmission. The preferred method for shiftin[...]

  • Page 142

    Shifting into NEUTRAL { CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on page 2-49 . To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN. 3. Press the foot brake pedal and put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). 4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High. 5. Simultaneously press and hold the Two-Wheel High and Four-Wheel Low buttons for 10 seconds. The re[...]

  • Page 143

    4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the red light will go out. 5. Release the parking brake. 6. You may start the engine and shift the transmission to the desired position. Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the different modes may cause the transfer case to enter the shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer case from possible damage and will only allow the transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds. The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to three minutes. 7. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL the red light will go out. Parking Brake To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right [...]

  • Page 144

    Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. With four-wheel drive, if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-67 . 1. Hold the [...]

  • Page 145

    Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission) { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to. If you have to leave your vehic[...]

  • Page 146

    Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK position. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-24 and “Torque Lock” under Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-52 . If your vehicle has an Allison Transmission ® , the transmission is equipped with a park pawl designed to hold the higher weight of commercial medium duty trucks. Therefore, the Allison Transmission ® uses larger parts than other automatic trans[...]

  • Page 147

    Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) { CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the manual transmission is in gear. Your or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on page 2-49 for more information. Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the ignition key to LOCK, press the key release button, remove the key and release the clutch. If you are parking on a hill, or if you are p[...]

  • Page 148

    Engine Exhaust { CAUTION: Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming in if: • Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. • Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. • Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. • Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. • Repairs were not done correctly. • Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle: • Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and • Have your vehicle fixed immediately.[...]

  • Page 149

    { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when it is on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the automatic transmission shift lever to PARK (P), or the manual transmission shift lever to NEUTRAL. { CAUTION: Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll, even if your automat[...]

  • Page 150

    Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Pull or push the tab under the mirror to adjust it to the night or daytime setting. In the nighttime setting, the glare from headlamps behind the vehicle will be less intense. Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar ® and Compass Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview mirror with a compass and the OnStar ® system. There are three additional buttons for the OnStar ® system. See your dealer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar ® . See OnStar ® System on page 2-69 for more information about the services OnStar ® provides. Mirror Operation When turned on, this mirror automatically dims to the proper level to min[...]

  • Page 151

    Compass Variance Compass variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings. To adjust for compass variance, do the following: 1. Find your current location and variance zone number on the map. 2. Press and hold the on/of f button for six seconds. Release the button when ZON[...]

  • Page 152

    Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar ® , Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, an automatic dimming mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark. The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the outside temperature will both appear in the display at the same time. P (On/Off): This is the on/of f button. Temperature and Compass Display Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to turn the compass/temperature display on or off. If the display reads CAL, you will need to calibrate the compass. For more information[...]

  • Page 153

    Compass Variance The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings. To adjust for compass variance do the following: 1. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map. 2. Press and hold the on/of f button until a Z and a zone number appe[...]

  • Page 154

    Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs: • After approximately five seconds, the display does not show a compass heading (N for North, for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. • The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly. In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or until CAL is displayed. The compass can be calibrated by driving [...]

  • Page 155

    Compass Operation Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on or off. There is a compass display in the window in the upper right corner of the mirror face. The compass displays a maximum of two characters. For example, “NE” is displayed for north-east. Compass Calibration Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will be displayed in the compass window on the mirror. The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction. Compass Variance Compass variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is set t[...]

  • Page 156

    Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic mirror, it will, when on, automatically dim to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark. The mirror also includes a display in the upper right corner of the mirror face. The compass reading and the outside temperature will both appear in the display at the same time. The dual display can be turned on or off by briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button. Temperature Display The temperature can be displayed by pressing the TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly, will toggle the temperature reading on and off. To alternate the tem[...]

  • Page 157

    Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs: • If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle. • After approximately five seconds, the display does not show a compass heading (N for North, for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. • The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly. In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds or until C[...]

  • Page 158

    To adjust for compass variance: 1. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map. 2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds until a zone number appears in the display. 3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the button, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. Passenger Airbag Indicator The mirror may be equipped with a passenger airbag indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons. If the vehicle has this feature the mirror will display the word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the passenger airbag is enabled. For more informa[...]

  • Page 159

    Outside Camper-Type Mirrors If your vehicle is equipped with this style camper-type mirrors, they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of the objects behind you. Pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer. If your vehicle is equipped with this style camper-type mirrors, they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of the objects behind you. Adjust the mirror by turning it left or right. Once the mirror is adjusted to the correct position, tighten the set screw to hold the mirror in place. These mirrors can also be manually folded in. On the lower portion of the mirror is a convex mirror. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see [...]

  • Page 160

    Outside West Coast-Type Mirrors If your vehicle is equipped with these mirrors, they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of objects behind you. A. Outer Mirror Frame B. Mirror Head C. Nut The mirrors can be adjusted by turning the mirror head (B) and moving the outer mirror frame (A) backward or forward. You can also loosen the nut (C) on the top and bottom of the outer mirror frame to tilt the mirror head. Outside Power Mirrors If your vehicle is equipped with power outside mirrors, the controls are located on the driver’s door armrest. Move the selector switch located above the control pad to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to adjust, then press the dots located [...]

  • Page 161

    Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, the controls are located on the driver’s door armrest. Move the upper selector switch to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to adjust; then press the dots located on the four-way control pad to adjust the mirror. The mirrors may also include a memory function which works together with the memory seats. See Memory Seat on page 2-79 for more information. To fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch, located above the mirror control, to the middle position. The mirror control will illuminate. Press the right or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold the mirrors. You may notice the [...]

  • Page 162

    Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, the driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and off settings found on the electrochromic mirror. Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors If the vehicle has the memory package, the outside mirrors are able to perform the curb view assist mirror function. This feature will cause the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in allowing the driver to view the curb when parallel parking. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a short delay has occ[...]

  • Page 163

    OnStar ® System OnStar ® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite technology, wireless communications, and live advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety, security, information, and convenience services. If your airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar ® Emergency where we can request emergency services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in the car, call OnStar ® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press the OnStar ® button and they will get you the help you need. A complete OnStar ® User’s Guide and the Terms and Conditions of the OnStar ® Subscription Serv[...]

  • Page 164

    Directions and Connections ® Plan • All Safe and Sound Plan Services • Driving Directions • RideAssist • Information and Convenience Services OnStar ® Personal Calling As an OnStar ® subscriber, the Personal Calling capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice commands with no additional contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar ® Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar ® User’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar ® advisor by pressing the OnStar ® button or calling 1-888-[...]

  • Page 165

    Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System, a combined universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, and home lighting. If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal Home Remote Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation i[...]

  • Page 166

    Universal Home Remote System Operation Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any garage door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of your Universal Home Remote Transmitter. Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in the programming steps. Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as fo[...]

  • Page 167

    4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons. 5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released. To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under “Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two se[...]

  • Page 168

    Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner. If you live in Canada, or you are having diff iculty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with the following: Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and rele[...]

  • Page 169

    Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button To program a device to Universal Home Remote using a Universal Home Remote button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home Remote button. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in this section. For additional information on Universal Home Remote, see Customer Assistance Off ices on page 7-4 . Storage Areas Glove Box Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the handle upward. Cupholder(s) Your vehicle may have cuph[...]

  • Page 170

    Front Storage Area Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage compartment in the front bench seat. To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the lid pop up and swing open. The storage compartment may have a cassette/compact disc holder. Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle may be equipped with a console compartment between the bucket seats. To open it, press the button located on the right side of the front of the lid and swing the lid open. Your vehicle may have a compact disc holder in the console. Your console may have a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat passengers to use. The front cupholder pulls out an[...]

  • Page 171

    A. Back rail B. Side rail C. Rear bow D. Center bow E. Front bow F. Front rail 2. Remove the tonneau cover from the notch in the front rail on the driver’s side of the vehicle. 3. Remove the three bows by gently pushing them against the spring-loaded end. The three bows are labeled front, center, rear to remind you of the order in which to reinstall them. 2-77[...]

  • Page 172

    4. To add cargo to the box, remove all bows and the back rail and stow them safely. To clean the tonneau cover, use mild soap and water. If necessary, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt trapped in the grain of the material. Sunroof The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition must be on or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more information. The sunroof control is located on the overhead console. Press the rear of the control to open the sunroof to the vent position, then press the rear of the control again to express-open the sunroof. To close the sunroof, press and [...]

  • Page 173

    Vehicle Personalization In addition to the following features, your vehicle may also have features that can be programmed through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-64 for more information. Memory Seat If your vehicle has this feature, the controls for the memory function are located on the driver’s door. These buttons are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver’s seat and both the driver’s and passenger’s outside mirrors. The settings for these features can be saved for up to two drivers. To store the memory settings, do the following: 1. If you have an automatic transmission, place the vehicle in PARK (P). If you have a ma[...]

  • Page 174

    Easy Exit Seat The controls for this memory function are located on the driver’s door. B (Easy Exit Seat): This button is used to program and recall the desired driver’s seat position when exiting or entering the vehicle. The seat position can be saved for up to two drivers. To store the seat exit position, do the following: 1. If you have an automatic transmission, place the vehicle in PARK (P). If you have a manual transmission, set the parking brake. 2. Press and release the 1 or 2 button. The seat will move to the stored memory position. 3. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position. 4. Press and hold the exit button of the memory control for three seconds. A double chime will soun[...]

  • Page 175

    Instrument Panel Overview .............................. .3-4 Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... .3-6 Other Warning Devices .................................. .3-6 Horn ............................................................ .3-6 Tilt Wheel .................................................... .3-6 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................ .3-7 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ....................... .3-7 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ................. .3-8 Flash-to-Pass ................................................ .3-8 Windshield Wipers ......................................... .3-9 Windshield Washer ........................................ .3-9 Crui[...]

  • Page 176

    Four-Wheel-Drive Light ................................. .3-49 Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................... .3-49 Cargo Lamp Light ........................................ .3-49 Fuel Gage .................................................. .3-50 Low Fuel Warning Light ................................ .3-50 Driver Information Center (DIC) ...................... .3-51 DIC Operation and Displays .......................... .3-52 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ .3-54 DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ .3-64 Audio System(s) ............................................ .3-70 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ...............[...]

  • Page 177

    ✍ NOTES 3-3[...]

  • Page 178

    Instrument Panel Overview Automatic Transmission Version shown, Manual Transmission Version similar 3-4[...]

  • Page 179

    The main components of your instrument panel are the following: A. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp Override on page 3-17 . B. Headlamp Controls. See Headlamps on page 3-13 . C. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-29 . D. Automatic Transfer Case/Electronic Transfer Case/Traction Assist System (TAS). See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-36 and Traction Assist System (TAS) on page 4-9 . E. Multifunction Lever. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7 . F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-31 . G. Range Selection Mode (Allison Transmission ® only) Button (If Equipped). See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-24 . H. Gearshift Lever. See A[...]

  • Page 180

    Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of the steering column. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key is not in the ignition. Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals will not work. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 fee[...]

  • Page 181

    To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: • G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 3-7 . • 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8 . • Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8 . • N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on page 3-9 . • L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer on page 3-9 . • I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on page 3-10 . For information on the hea[...]

  • Page 182

    As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-124 . Turn Signal On Chime If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal lever to the of f position. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 53[...]

  • Page 183

    Windshield Wipers Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not clear the windshield well, making it harder to see and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. For more information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-72 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. You control the windshield wipers by turning the band with the wiper symbol on it. 8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to mist. Hold i[...]

  • Page 184

    Cruise Control 9 (Off): This position turns the system off. If your vehicle is equipped with an Allison ® automatic transmission, see “Grade Braking and Cruise Grade Braking (Allison Transmission ® ) under Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-30 for an explanation of how cruise control interacts with the tap up/down gear selection, tow/haul and grade braking systems. R (On): This position activates the system. + (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed. T (Set): Press this button to set the speed. With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Thi[...]

  • Page 185

    Setting Cruise Control { CAUTION: If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control. 1. Move the cruise control switch to on. 2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and release it. 4. Take your foot of f the accelerator pedal. The cruise symbol on the instrument panel will illuminate when the cruise control is engaged. Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, disengages[...]

  • Page 186

    Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed: • Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds, cruise control will turn off. • Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. Reducing Speed While [...]

  • Page 187

    Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased. Headlamps The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel operates the headlamps. Turn the control clockwise to operate the lamps. The headlamp control has four positions: 9 (Off): Turning the control to this position turns of f the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamps. AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to this position puts the system into automatic headlamp mode. ; (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this position turns on the parking lamps, together with the following: • Sidemarker Lamps • Taillamps • License Plate Lamps ?[...]

  • Page 188

    Headlamps on Reminder A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition is off, in LOCK, ACCESSORY, or a door is open. To disable the chime, turn the light off then back on. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met: • The ignition is on • The ext[...]

  • Page 189

    The headlamps will remain off once the vehicle is started for as long as you are parked. If you release the parking brake, the lights will turn on. If the parking brake is not released before you begin to drive, the exterior lamps will turn on above 2 mph (3.2 km/h). Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille. Be sure it is not covered, or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on. The system may also turn on your headlamps when driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather or a tunnel. This is normal. There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running La[...]

  • Page 190

    Fog Lamps If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. The fog lamp button is located on the left side of the instrument panel. Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work. Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press the button again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow in the button when the fog lamps are on. Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on your headlamps. The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the fog lamps will come on again. The fog lam[...]

  • Page 191

    When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof mounted lamp, pressing the button will activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light near the button. Pressing the button again will turn off the roof mounted lamp. If your vehicle has this button, your vehicle may have the snow plow prep package. For further information see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4-54 . Instrument Panel Brightness D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to the headlamp control. Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel lights. Turn the thumbwheel up to return the radio displ[...]

  • Page 192

    Front Reading Lamps The reading lamps are located on the overhead console. To turn on the reading lamps, press the button located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the button again. The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you want. Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button located next to the lamp. The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted. Cargo Lamp The cargo lamp button is located on the left side of the instrument panel. Press the button to turn the cargo lamp on. Press the button again to turn it off. An indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will illuminate when the cargo lamp is turned on,[...]

  • Page 193

    To use the outlet, lift the cover. When not using it, always close the cover. Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem, see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power plugs. Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions include[...]

  • Page 194

    Climate Controls Climate Control System Fan Knob The fan knob on the left side of the control panel adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise. To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the of f position. 9 (Off): If the fan is of f, outside air will still enter the vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of the mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted using the temperature knob. Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward[...]

  • Page 195

    ) (Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets. The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings. 6 (Floor): This setting directs most of the air through the floor outlets, and the rest of the air is divided between the windshield defroster outlets and the side window defroster outlets. W (Defog): Airflow is delivered through the floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the side window defroster outlets. The air flow can be divided between floor and defrost depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings. 1 (Defrost): This setting directs most a[...]

  • Page 196

    Mode Control To change the current mode, select one of the following: H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets. ) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the instrument panel outlets; then directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is directed toward the windshield and the side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. 6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with a little air directed to the windshield and the side window outlets. h (Recirculation): The recirculation mode is used to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. Use this mode to help prev[...]

  • Page 197

    Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly. There are two modes to choose from to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. Turn the right knob to select one of the following modes: - (Defog): This mode directs the air to the floor outlets, windshield and the side window outlets. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically to dehumidify the air to prevent window f[...]

  • Page 198

    Dual Automatic Climate Control System With this system, you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in this section. You can select different climate control settings for the driver and passengers. Driver’s Side Temperature Knob The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver’s side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this s[...]

  • Page 199

    Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob The passenger’s side knob can be used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this section. Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or increase the cabin temperature. The display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing to the passenger will be displayed under and to the right of the temperature set[...]

  • Page 200

    2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature. To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C) temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the temperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C) the system will remain at the maximum heat setting. Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster. Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This[...]

  • Page 201

    H (Panel): This setting will deliver air to the instrument panel outlets. ) (Bi-Level): This setting will deliver warmer air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets. 6 (Floor): This setting will deliver air to the floor outlets. - (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section. @ (Recirculation): Press this button to limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather. Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the vehicle. The light on the recirculation butt[...]

  • Page 202

    Whenever you press AUTO, the display will change to show the following: • The current driver’s set temperature and an arrow for five seconds • The current passenger’s set temperature setting and an arrow for five seconds • The automatic air delivery mode and fan speed If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings are the same when AUTO is pressed, the temperature setting and both arrows will be displayed for five seconds along with the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed. After the five second update, the display will change to show the temperature setting, both arrows and AUTO. Air Conditioning # (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air conditioni[...]

  • Page 203

    Defogging and Defrosting You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front defrost button to defrost the front windshield. - (Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of fog or moisture. Press the mode button to select this setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and windshield outlets. 0 (Front Defrost): Press the front defrost button to defrost the windshield. The system will automatically control the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode. If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air conditioning compressor will automatically run to help[...]

  • Page 204

    Operation Tips • Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow, or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. • When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the fan knob all the way to the right for a few moments before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your window. • Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle. • Adding outside equipment to the front of your vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the performance of the [...]

  • Page 205

    Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically. United States Heavy Duty Automatic Transmission version shown. Canada, Light Duty Automatic and Manual Transmission Clusters similar. 3-31[...]

  • Page 206

    Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Engine Hour Meter Display The Driver Information Center (DIC) can also display the number of hours the engine has run. To display the hour meter, turn the ignition off, press and hold the reset button for at least four seconds. The hour meter will be displayed for up to 30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned on. See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-52 for more information. Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far y[...]

  • Page 207

    Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will be provided for several seconds to remind people to buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light will also be provided and stay on for several seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should buckle your seat belt. This chime and light will be repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-54 for more information on driver and passenger safety belt reminders. If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-80 for more information. Airbag Readiness Light There [...]

  • Page 208

    Airbag Of f Light If your vehicle has an airbag off switch, it also has an airbag off light. See Airbag Of f Switch on page 1-77 for more on this, including important safety information. When you turn the right front passenger’s airbag off, this light will come on and stay on to remind you that the airbag has been turned off. This light will go of f when you turn the airbag on. { CAUTION: If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Do not turn off [...]

  • Page 209

    { CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on when you have turned off the airbag, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. The right front passenger’s airbag could inflate even though the switch is off. If your vehicle is a regular cab pickup and this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the national government has identified as a member of a passenger airbag risk group sit in the right front passenger’s position (for example, do not secure a rear-facing child restraint in your vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) If your vehicle is an extended cab pickup and this ever happens, do not let anyone whom the [...]

  • Page 210

    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system, your rearview mirror will have a passenger airbag status indicator. When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. Your vehicle may have a label on your sun visor that says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, i[...]

  • Page 211

    Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat the unless passenger airbag status indicator shows off. Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the airbag is off. Here is why: { CAUTION: Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child restraints be transported in vehicles with a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restrain[...]

  • Page 212

    If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-80 or Airbag Off Switch on page 1-77 for more on this, including important safety information. { CAUTION: If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk [...]

  • Page 213

    Battery Warning Light If this light is displayed when the engine is running, you may have a problem with your charging system. The battery display will also stay on while the key is in RUN until the engine is started. If the light stays on after starting the engine it could indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some other charging system problem. Have it checked right away. Driving with this light displayed could drain your battery. If you must drive a short distance with this light displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and the air conditioner. Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in RUN, this gage shows your bat[...]

  • Page 214

    Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power. You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories. Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. Up-Shift Lig[...]

  • Page 215

    Brake System Warning Light With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will flash when you set the parking brake. The light will flash if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. This light should come on briefly when you turn the ign[...]

  • Page 216

    Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light With the anti-lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds. That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a chime sound when the light is on steady. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. In addition to bo[...]

  • Page 217

    Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is working. During a majority of the operation, the gage will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity. See Engine Overheating on page 5-37 . Transmission Temperature Gage Your vehicle may be equipped with a transmission temperature gage. When your ignition is on, the gage shows the temperature of the transmission fluid. The nor[...]

  • Page 218

    If your vehicle has an Allison transmission, and the fluid reaches temperatures of approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the driver information center will display a TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE warning message and a chime will sound until the temperature falls below 265°F (129°C). Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in PARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until the transmission temperature falls below 265°F (129°C). If the transmission continues to operate above 265°F (130°C), contact your nearest dealer or the GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 . Notice: If you drive your vehic[...]

  • Page 219

    Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The check engine light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunc[...]

  • Page 220

    If the Light is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: • Reducing vehicle speed • Avoiding hard accelerations • Avoiding steep uphill grades • If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps[...]

  • Page 221

    Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection: Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen i[...]

  • Page 222

    A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible. See “OIL PRESSURE LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-54 and Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-20 . { CAUTION: Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine o[...]

  • Page 223

    Highbeam On Light This light will come on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8 . Four-Wheel-Drive Light The four-wheel-drive indicator will light up when you shift a manual transfer case into four-wheel drive and the front axle engages. Some delay between shifting and the indicator’s lighting is normal. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-36 for more information. Tow/Haul Mode Light This light is displayed when the Tow/Haul mode has been activated. For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-30 . Cargo Lamp Light This light will come on when the cargo lamp is in use. For more information see Cargo Lamp on page 3-18 . 3-49[...]

  • Page 224

    Fuel Gage When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank. The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible. When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-54 for more information. Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage. • At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full. • It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it [...]

  • Page 225

    Driver Information Center (DIC) The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, they are located on the steering wheel. The DIC can display information such as the trip odometer, fuel economy, customization features, and warning/status messages. If your vehicle does not have DIC steering wheel buttons, you will not have all of the features listed. Scroll through the odometer, trip odometer, engine hours, and selected range if your vehicle has an Allison Transmission ® by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster. Turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages by pressi[...]

  • Page 226

    DIC Operation and Displays The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering wheel. These buttons are trip information, fuel information, customization, and select. The button functions are detailed in the following pages. Trip Information Button 3 (Trip Information): Press the trip information button to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A, TRIP B, TIMER, ENGINE HOURS, and SELECTED RANGE. Odometer: Press the trip information button until ODOMETER appear[...]

  • Page 227

    Engine Hours: Press the trip information button until ENGINE HOURS appears on the display. This mode shows the total number of hours the engine has run. Pressing and holding the reset stem located on the instrument cluster for about four seconds will also display the engine hour information after the odometer is displayed when the vehicle is off. Selected Range: If your vehicle has an Allison Transmission ® and the vehicle is in the MANUAL MODE (M) position, press the trip information button until SELECTED RANGE: M# appears on the display. The DIC will display the current gear range. For example, if the gear range is set to 6, the DIC will display SELECTED RANGE: M6. See Automatic Transmiss[...]

  • Page 228

    Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display. The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions. Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-23 . In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-20 and [...]

  • Page 229

    The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them. BATTERY NOT CHARGING On some vehicles, if the battery is not charging during operation, this message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer as soon as possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. See Battery Warning Light on page 3-39 and Voltmeter Gage on page 3-39 . BUCKLE PASSENGER If your v[...]

  • Page 230

    This message is an additional reminder to the Safety Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster. See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-33 for more information. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. CHANGE ENGINE OIL This message is displayed when the engine oil needs to be changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message. See Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-23 , Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-20 , and [...]

  • Page 231

    CHECK WASHER FLUID If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear on the DIC. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-47 . Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer reservoir will clear the message. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. DRIVER DOOR AJAR If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles and close the door again. Check to see if t[...]

  • Page 232

    FUEL LEVEL LOW If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. See Low Fuel Warning Light on page 3-50 , Fuel Gage on page 3-50 , and Fuel on page 5-6 . KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry S[...]

  • Page 233

    OIL LIFE RESET This message will appear on the display for about 10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil message. See “Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-52 and Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-20 for more information. OIL PRESSURE LOW Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-20 for more information. If low oil pressure levels occur, this message[...]

  • Page 234

    REDUCED ENGINE POWER This message is displayed when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode. See Engine Overheating on page 5-37 for additional information. RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (Crew Cab) If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed, this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstacles and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odomete[...]

  • Page 235

    SERVICE BRAKE BOOSTER { CAUTION: Your brake system may not be working properly if the SERVICE BRAKE BOOSTER message is displayed. If the brake system warning light is also on, you should have the vehicle towed for service. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-41 . If the brake system warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but the supplemental brake assist system on vehicles with rear disc brakes may not operate properly. In the event of a vacuum loss, you may not have vacuum power assist for braking. The brake pedal will be harder to push and it will take longer to stop. If you continue to drive with this message displayed it can lead to a crash. Have the brake system serviced a[...]

  • Page 236

    SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the battery charging system, this message will appear on the DIC. Under certain conditions, the battery warning light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. See Battery Warning Light on page 3-39 . The battery will not be charging at an optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode. The vehicle is safe to drive, however you should have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will a[...]

  • Page 237

    TRANSMISSION HOT Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you can damage the transmission. This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed. If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high, this message will appear on the DIC display. When the transmission enters the protection mode, you may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature returns to normal, th[...]

  • Page 238

    TURN SIGNAL ON If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this message will appear on the display and you will hear a chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off position. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC display. DIC Vehicle Customization Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program some features to one setting based on your preference. All of the customizable options listed may not be available on your vehicle. Only the opt[...]

  • Page 239

    Unlock Doors (Automatic Transmission only) If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS appears in the display. To select your preference for automatic unlocking, press the select button while UNLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices: UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not [...]

  • Page 240

    Lock Feedback Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your preference for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the select button while LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices: LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time you press the lock button. LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will flash each time you press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless ent[...]

  • Page 241

    Headlamp Delay Press the customization button until HEADLAMP DELAY appears in the display. To select your preference for how long the headlamps will stay on when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button while HEADLAMP DELAY is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices: • HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds) (default) • HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC • HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC • HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute) • HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN • HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN • HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF The amount of time you choose will be the amount of time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn o[...]

  • Page 242

    EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to the exit position when the key is removed from the ignition. Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature. For more information on seat position exit, see Memory Seat on page 2-79 . Curb View Press the customization button until CURB VIEW appears in the display. To select your preference for curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the following choices: CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into RE[...]

  • Page 243

    Language To select your preference for display language, press the select button while LANGUAGE is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the following languages: • ENGLISH • FRANCAIS (French) • ESPANOL (Spanish) Choose one of the available options and press the customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it. If you accidentally choose a language that you do not want or understand, press and hold the customization button and the trip information button at the same time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages in their particular language. English will be in English, Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in Spanish. W[...]

  • Page 244

    Audio System(s) Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the pages following to familiarize yourself with its features. Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 . By taking a few moments to read this manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel controls (if equipped). { [...]

  • Page 245

    Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts, parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle operate through the GM radio/entertainment system. If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not work. Make sure that replacement or additional equipment is compatible with your vehicle before installing it. See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-4 . Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-22 for more information. Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) Press [...]

  • Page 246

    AM-FM Radio Playing the Radio PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume. RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display between the radio station frequency, band, and the time. When the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time. Finding a Station AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2, or AM. The display will show the selection. TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations. o SEEK p : Press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there. To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio wi[...]

  • Page 247

    Setting Preset Stations Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following steps: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will return. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) AUDIO: To adjust bass or treble, press and release AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display. Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease t[...]

  • Page 248

    To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, first end out of audio mode by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform that function or by waiting five seconds for the display to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display. Fade may not be available if the vehicle is a regular cab model. Radio Messages CAL (Calibrated): The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL appears on the display it means that the radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and must be returned to your GM dealer for service. LOC (Locked): This message is di[...]

  • Page 249

    Radio Data System (RDS) The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio can do the following: • Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming • Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies • Display messages from radio stations This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. While the radio is tuned to[...]

  • Page 250

    For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name. To change the default on the display, press the INFO knob until you see the display you want, then hold the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will now be the default. AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will a[...]

  • Page 251

    Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following steps: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will return for that pushbutton. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. To store an equalization setting to a preset station perform the following: 1. Tune to the preset station. 2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select the equalization set[...]

  • Page 252

    Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position, while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold it until the radio produces one beep. The balance or fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the display will show the spe[...]

  • Page 253

    SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing the following: 1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display. 2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY. 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the stations in the PTY. 4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop at a station. BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. To turn alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will a[...]

  • Page 254

    RDS Messages INFO (Information): If the current station has a message, the information symbol will appear on the display. Press this button to see the message. The message may display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the message will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the message, press and release the INFO button. A new group of words will appear on the display after every press of the button. Once the complete message has been displayed, the information symbol will disappear from the display until another new message is received. The last message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view the las[...]

  • Page 255

    XM™ Radio Messages Radio Display Message Condition Action Required XL (Explicit Language Channels) XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language. These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM Acquiring channel audio (after 4 s[...]

  • Page 256

    XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Message Condition Action Required No Info Category Name not available No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Info No Text/Informational message available No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. Not Found No channel available for the chosen category There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles.[...]

  • Page 257

    Playing a CD Insert a CD part way into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the eject button or the INFO knob. If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on the display. As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display. The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller C[...]

  • Page 258

    3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on the display. 4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton [...]

  • Page 259

    CD Messages If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons: • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. • You are driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. • There may have been a problem while burning the CD. • The label may be caught in the CD player. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down [...]

  • Page 260

    Radio Data System (RDS) The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio can do the following: • Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming • Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies • Display messages from radio stations This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. While the radio is tuned to[...]

  • Page 261

    For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name. To change the default on the display, press the INFO knob until you see the display you want, then hold the knob until the display flashes. The selected display will now be the default. AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL w[...]

  • Page 262

    Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following steps: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will return for that pushbutton. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. To store an equalization setting to a preset station perform the following: 1. Tune to the preset station. 2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select the equalization set[...]

  • Page 263

    Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. To adjust the fade between the front and the rear speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold it until the radio produces one beep. The balance or fade will be adjusted to the middle position. To adjust all tone and speaker co[...]

  • Page 264

    SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing the following: 1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display. 2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY. 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the stations in the PTY. 4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop at a station. BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. To turn alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will a[...]

  • Page 265

    RDS Messages INFO (Information): If the current station has a message, the information symbol will appear on the display. Press this button to see the message. The message may display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the message will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the message, press and release the INFO button. A new group of words will appear on the display after every press of the button. Once the complete message has been displayed, the information symbol will disappear from the display until another new message is received. The last message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view the las[...]

  • Page 266

    XM™ Radio Messages Radio Display Message Condition Action Required XL (Explicit Language Channels) XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language. These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM Acquiring channel audio (after 4 s[...]

  • Page 267

    XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Message Condition Action Required No Info Category Name not available No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Info No Text/Informational message available No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. Not Found No channel available for the chosen category There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles.[...]

  • Page 268

    Playing a Cassette Tape The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject button to remove the tape and start over. If the ignition and radio are off, the tape can be inserted, but will not play until ignition and radio are on. If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. Th[...]

  • Page 269

    3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed. The station frequency and REV will appear on the display. Select stations during reverse operation by using TUNE and SEEK. 4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly advance the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to playing speed. The station frequency and FWD will appear on the display. Select stations during forward operation by using TUNE and SEEK. 5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side of the tape. © SEEK ¨ : The right arrow is the same as the NEXT pushbutt[...]

  • Page 270

    CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care of the Cassette Tape Player on page 3-128 . If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good cassette. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the problem. CD Adapter Kits It is possible to use a portable CD player with the cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape [...]

  • Page 271

    Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen instead. Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris. If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages” later in this section. 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to [...]

  • Page 272

    © SCAN ¨ : Press and hold either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time will appear on the display. To change the default on the display, track or elapsed time, press the knob until you see the display you want, then press and hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and the selected display will now be the default. BAND: Press this butto[...]

  • Page 273

    Listening to a DVD If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button until RSE appears on the radio display. The current radio source will stop and the DVD sound will come through the speakers. To stop listening to the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button, if a cassette tape or a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button to select a different source. When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear on the radio display. T[...]

  • Page 274

    Radio Data System (RDS) The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio can do the following: • Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of programming • Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies • Display messages from radio stations This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. While the radio is tuned to[...]

  • Page 275

    For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name. To change the default on the display, press the INFO knob until you see the display you want, then hold the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will now be the default. AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL will a[...]

  • Page 276

    Setting Preset Stations Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following steps: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will return for that pushbutton. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. To store an equalization setting to a preset station perform the following: 1. Tune to the preset station. 2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select the equalization set[...]

  • Page 277

    Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers. To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers. To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position while it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the middle position. To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position, push an[...]

  • Page 278

    SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing the following: 1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will appear on the display. 2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the TYPE button to select a PTY. 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the stations in the PTY. 4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop scanning. BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. To turn alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will app[...]

  • Page 279

    RDS Messages INFO (Information): If the current station has a message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this button to see the message. The message may display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the message will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the message, press and release the INFO button. A new group of words will appear on the display after every press of this button. Once the complete message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received. The last message can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view the last message until a new message is re[...]

  • Page 280

    XM™ Radio Messages Radio Display Message Condition Action Required XL (Explicit Language Channels) XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language. These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM Acquiring channel audio (after 4 s[...]

  • Page 281

    XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Message Condition Action Required No Info Category Name not available No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Info No Text/Informational message available No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. Not Found No channel available for the chosen category There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles.[...]

  • Page 282

    Playing a CD If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on the display. As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display. The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been[...]

  • Page 283

    To insert multiple CDs, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds. You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and MULTI LOAD # will appear on the display. 3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot, label side up. The player will pull the CD in. Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, you can load another CD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load more than six. To load more than one CD but less th[...]

  • Page 284

    If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is pushed back into the player, before the 25-second time period is complete, the player will sense an error and will try to eject the CD several times before stopping. Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed. { REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release the button to play the passage. The [...]

  • Page 285

    © SEEK ¨ : Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either arrow is pressed more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the CD. © SCAN ¨ : To scan one CD, press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until TRACK SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning. To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until ALL CD SCAN appears on the display and you hear a bee[...]

  • Page 286

    S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save more than 20 selections. To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the order they were saved. Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return to the first saved track. To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following steps: 1. Turn the CD player on. 2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on. S-LIST will appear on the display. 3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the desired track to be deleted. 4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for t[...]

  • Page 287

    CD Messages CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons: • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. • You are driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. • There may have been a problem while burning the CD. • The label may be caught in the CD player. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your GM dealer. I[...]

  • Page 288

    Rear Seat Entertainment System Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD player, a video display screen, two sets of wireless headphones, and a remote control. Parental Control This button is located behind the video screen. Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze the video and mute the audio. The video screen will display Parental Control ON and the power indicator light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all other button operations from the remote control and the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button. Press this button again to restore operation of the DVD player. This button may also be us[...]

  • Page 289

    Both sets of rear seat headphones may include foam ear pads that can be replaced. Foam ear pads on these headphones may become worn or damaged. The headphone foam ear pads can become damaged if they are not handled or stored properly. If the foam ear pads do become damaged or worn out, the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set. It is not necessary to replace the complete headphone set. The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs. See your dealer for more information. Battery Replacement To change the batteries, do the following: 1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door located on the left side of the headphone earpiece. 2. Replace the two AAA b[...]

  • Page 290

    How to Change the Video Format when in the Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC. In some countries, the video format may be in the PAL system. To change the video format, perform the following: 1. Press the display menu button. 2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video Format option. 3. Press the enter button to select Video Format. 4. Press the right or left arrow button to select the desired video format. 5. Press the enter button to accept the change. Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be heard through the following possible sources: • Wireless Headphones • Vehicle Speakers • Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Re[...]

  • Page 291

    Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console. To use the video screen, push forward on the release latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s position as desired. When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its latched position. The DVD player and display will continue to operate when the screen is in the up or the down position. The video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless headphones and the remote control. If the screen is in the closed position, the signals will not be available for the operation of the headphones or the remote control. Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Vid[...]

  • Page 292

    DVD Player Buttons O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate when the power is on. X (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD. SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the DVD player and an auxiliary source. c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD. s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue the play of the DVD or CD. y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu[...]

  • Page 293

    Playing a Disc To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue loading the disc and the player will automatically start, if the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when RAP is active. If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote control. Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of the copyright information or the previews. Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished. If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer to the on-screen instructions. Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop but[...]

  • Page 294

    Remote Control Buttons O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player on and off. v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD. n , q , p , o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu. z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and dynamic range compression. The dynamic range compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio and increase low audio produced by some DVDs. e (Audio): Press this button to display a menu that will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format and content of this function will vary for each disc. r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to [...]

  • Page 295

    1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad provides you with the capability of direct chapter, title, and track number selection. } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9. Press this button before inputting the number. (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after inputting a number to clear the number(s). P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on. The backlight will time out after about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on. y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the up, down, le[...]

  • Page 296

    Battery Replacement To change the batteries, do the following: 1. Remove the battery compartment door located on the bottom of the remote control. 2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Close the battery door securely. If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place. Problem Recommended Action No power. The ignition might not be in on or accessory. The parental control button might have been turned on. The power indicator light will flash. Disc will not play. The system might be off. The parental con[...]

  • Page 297

    Problem Recommended Action In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices. Change the Video Format to PAL or NTSC. See “Stereo RCA Jacks” previously for how to change the video format. The language in the audio or on the screen is wrong. Check the audio or language selection in the main DVD menu. The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window. Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly. The parental control button might have been turned on. The power indicator light will flash. Problem Recommended Action After stoppi[...]

  • Page 298

    Problem Recommended Action Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes. Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range, and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using your cellular telephone in the vehicle. Check that the headphones are facing the front of the vehicle. I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer for assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the DVD player is in DVD mode. The audio/video skips or jumps. The DVD or CD could be dirty, scratched, or damaged. The audio from the radio for the Radio with Six-Disc CD and XM™ has taken over the audio from the DVD or CD when using the wired headphones[...]

  • Page 299

    Cleaning the Video Screen Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or too long on the video screen. Rear Seat Audio (RSA) This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any of the sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs. However, the rear seat passengers can only control the sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to and control cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs through the headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each[...]

  • Page 300

    x SEEK w : When listening to FM1, FM2, or AM, press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there. This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or the previous selection. This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a cassette tape. When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go to the next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. This function is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a CD. PROG (Program): Press this[...]

  • Page 301

    Audio Steering Wheel Controls If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the following: g (OnStar ® /Mute): If your vehicle has OnStar, press this button to interact with the OnStar system. See the OnStar ® System on page 2-69 in this manual for more information. If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this button to silence the system. Press it again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound. PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. When a cassette tape is playi[...]

  • Page 302

    Radio Reception You may experience frequency interference and static during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet. AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce these levels during the night. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere[...]

  • Page 303

    If there is a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer. When cleaning the cassette tape player with the recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut tape detection feature on the radio may recognize it as a broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ej[...]

  • Page 304

    Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. Care of the CD and DVD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. Fixed Mast Antenna The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it. Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still tightened to the cowl. If tightening is required, tighten by hand, then with a wrenc[...]

  • Page 305

    Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ......... .4-2 Defensive Driving .......................................... .4-2 Drunken Driving ............................................ .4-3 Control of a Vehicle ....................................... .4-6 Braking ........................................................ .4-6 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ .4-7 Braking in Emergencies .................................. .4-9 Traction Assist System (TAS) .......................... .4-9 Manual Selectable Ride ................................ .4-11 Locking Rear Axle ....................................... .4-12 Steering ..................................................... .4-1[...]

  • Page 306

    Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 1-12 . { CAUTION: Defensive driving really means “Be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or expressways, it means “Always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. Defensive driving requires tha[...]

  • Page 307

    Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: • Judgment • Muscular Coordination • Vision • Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. Many adults — by some estimates, nearly [...]

  • Page 308

    According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka. It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level. There is a gender difference, too. Women[...]

  • Page 309

    But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of t[...]

  • Page 310

    Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction Assist System (TAS) on page 4-9 . Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-4 . Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-41 . Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Fir[...]

  • Page 311

    Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with traff ic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traff ic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use[...]

  • Page 312

    Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels. The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.[...]

  • Page 313

    Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. Using Anti-Lock Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal. Braking in Emergencies With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very [...]

  • Page 314

    The traction off light will come on under the following conditions: • The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by pressing the TAS on/off button, located on the instrument panel, or by turning off the automatic engagement feature of the TAS. • The transmission is in FIRST (1); TAS will not operate in this gear. This is normal. • The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road. When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slows down or stops, the light will go off and TAS will turn on again. This is normal. • A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake System or engine-related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service. • If the vehicle has been driven with the TAS[...]

  • Page 315

    Manual Selectable Ride The main function of this system is to provide superior ride comfort while trailering or fully loaded, as well as for unloaded driving. This system also helps to provide: • Improved trailering stability • Improved handling response when trailering or fully loaded This button is located on the center of the instrument panel near the radio. Press it to activate the selectable ride setting as desired. An indicator light near the button will illuminate whenever the system is active. It is recommended to use this system as follows: • For optimum ride comfort in an unloaded vehicle the button should be out. The indicator light will not be lit. This button position indi[...]

  • Page 316

    FIRM (Loaded): Press the button to activate this setting, the indicator light will be lit. Use this setting to minimize trailer inputs to the vehicle or when the vehicle is fully loaded. This setting is also appropriate for off-road driving. You can select a setting at any time based on road and trailering conditions to provide the best ride and handling. Select a new setting whenever driving conditions change. Locking Rear Axle If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, this feature will allow th[...]

  • Page 317

    Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. See Traction Assist System (TAS) on page 4-9 . What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower. If you need to reduce your speed as [...]

  • Page 318

    An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. Of f-Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement,[...]

  • Page 319

    Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traff ic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traff ic accidents — the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: • Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and to cros[...]

  • Page 320

    • Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. Remember that if your passenger side outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is. • Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. • Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting[...]

  • Page 321

    If you have the Traction Assist System (TAS), remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid. See Traction Assist System (TAS) on page 4-9 . If you do not have this system, or if the system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust your drivi[...]

  • Page 322

    If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front bumper lower air dam. The front bumper lower air dam is held in place by a series of push-pins located around the lower edge of the front bumper. The push-pins are accessible from underneath the front bumper. The following steps must be performed on each of the push-pins to remove the air dam: 1. Insert a tool into the push-pin slot and pull downward until the push-pin snaps loose. 4-18[...]

  • Page 323

    2. While continuing to pull downward on the push-pin, squeeze and turn the expandable end of the push-pin with a tool until it releases from the retainer. 3. Pull the push-pins and lower dam assembly away from the retainers until the lower dam is free. When you are back on roads, though, be sure to replace the air dam. Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended periods without the front bumper lower air dam installed can cause improper air flow to the engine and may allow things like fog lamps or tow hooks on the front of your vehicle to be damaged. Always be sure to replace the front bumper air dam when you are finished off-road driving. 4-19[...]

  • Page 324

    To reinstall the lower air dam, do the following: 1. Line up each push-pin with its intended retainer and push the washer portion of the push-pin toward the retainer until it locks into place. 2. Push the flat end of the push-pin toward the retainer until it locks into place, making sure each is secure. Before You Go Of f-Roading There are some things to do before you go out. For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. Check to make sure all underbody shields (if equipped) are properly attached. Be sure you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid lev[...]

  • Page 325

    { CAUTION: • Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop. You or your passengers could be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks. • Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly. • Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible. You will find other important [...]

  • Page 326

    Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads. It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other can help quickly. Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know how to use it properly. Getting Familiar with Of f-Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home [...]

  • Page 327

    Scanning the Terrain Off-road driving can take you over many dif ferent kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are some things to consider. Surface Conditions: Of f-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking distances. Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you if y[...]

  • Page 328

    Driving on Of f-Road Hills Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle. { CAUTION: Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down them, you cannot control your speed. If you drive across them, you will roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness, do not drive the hill. Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is one of those hills that is just too [...]

  • Page 329

    Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some special steps. • Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel. • Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Do not use more power than you need, because you do not want your wheels to start spinning or sliding. • Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and turns, you might want to find another route. { CAUTION: Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills, always try to go straight up. • Ease up[...]

  • Page 330

    Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill? A: If this happens, there are some things you should do, and there are some things you must not do. First, here is what you should do: • Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake. • If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R). • If your engine has stopped running, you will need to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to PARK (P) (or shift to NEUTRAL if your vehicle[...]

  • Page 331

    Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the hill and decide I just cannot do it. What should I do? A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in PARK (P), or the manual transmission in FIRST (1), and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear. { CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P) (or, if you have the manual transmission, even if you are in gear). This is because the NEUTRAL position on the trans[...]

  • Page 332

    Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to consider a number of things: • How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control? • What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? • Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders? • What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and they will not have to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times. { CAU[...]

  • Page 333

    Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill? A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here is what to do. 1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift to PARK (P), or to NEUTRAL with the manual transmission, and, while still braking, restart the engine. 3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down. 4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help. Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some things to consider: •[...]

  • Page 334

    Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should I do? A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk the course” so you know what the surface is like before you drive it. Stalling on an Incline If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline, be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be right[...]

  • Page 335

    Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as quickly, turning is more diff icult, and you will need longer braking distances. It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not get stuck. When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced spe[...]

  • Page 336

    If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to start your engine. When you go through water, remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop. { CAUTION: Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive through r[...]

  • Page 337

    Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. Here are some tips on night driving. • Drive defensively. • Do not drink and drive. • Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. • Since you cannot see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. • Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. • In remote areas, watch for animals. • If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. No[...]

  • Page 338

    You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that the he[...]

  • Page 339

    The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traff ic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even people walking. It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. { CAUTION: Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle[...]

  • Page 340

    Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. Driving Through Flowing Water { CAUTION: Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. If you try to drive through flowing water, as you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could dro[...]

  • Page 341

    City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traff ic on them. You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traff ic signals. Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: • Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. • Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You will save time and energy. See Freeway Driving on page 4-38 . • Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traff ic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and [...]

  • Page 342

    Freeway Driving Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traff ic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traff ic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traff ic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. [...]

  • Page 343

    When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are. Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you are not fresh — such as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable [...]

  • Page 344

    Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: • Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool int[...]

  • Page 345

    • Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. { CAUTION: If you do not shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope. { CAUTION: Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. A[...]

  • Page 346

    Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving: • Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. • You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. Also see Tires on page 5-73 . Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the road pr[...]

  • Page 347

    What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there. Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution. If you have the Traction Assist System (TAS), it will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need to. You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or [...]

  • Page 348

    Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-7 . • Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. • Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a pat[...]

  • Page 349

    You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. { CAUTION: Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help keep CO out. Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than j[...]

  • Page 350

    If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck, but you must use caution. { CAUTION: If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of you[...]

  • Page 351

    Recovery Hooks (Except SS Model) Notice: SS Models have recovery hooks that are concealed by the front bumper trim covering. Use of the recovery hooks could cause damage to your vehicle. If you have the SS Model, do not use the recovery hooks. { CAUTION: These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back. Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty. Your vehicle may have recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle. You may need to use th[...]

  • Page 352

    Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label. { CAUTION: Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can [...]

  • Page 353

    The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-73 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-80 . There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle?[...]

  • Page 354

    Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs (136 kg) C Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg) Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs (136 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg) Example 1 Example 2 4-50[...]

  • Page 355

    Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = 1000 lbs (453 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight cap[...]

  • Page 356

    The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle. The Certification/Tire label also contains important information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See “What is front axle reserve capacity, and how do I calculate it?” under Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4-54 . { CAUTION:[...]

  • Page 357

    If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going. { CAUTION: Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. • Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. • When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. • Do not leave a seat [...]

  • Page 358

    Add-On Equipment When you carry removable items, you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment. Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle. *Equipment Maximum Weight Ladder Rack and Cargo 750 lbs (340 kg) Cross Toolbox and Cargo 400 lbs (181 kg) Side Boxes and Cargo 250 lbs per side (113 kg per side) *The combined weight for all rail-mounted equipment should not exceed 1,000 lbs (454 kg), excluded 1500 crew cab models w[...]

  • Page 359

    Q: How heavy can a snow plow safely be? A: The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many things, such as: • The options your vehicle came with, and the weight of those options. • The weight and number of passengers you intend to carry. • The weight of items you have added to your vehicle, like a tool box or truck cap. • The total weight of any additional cargo you intend to carry. Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow. The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the cab should not exceed 300 lb (135 kg). This means that you may only be able to carry one passenger. But, even this may be too much if you have got other equipment already adding to the weight of [...]

  • Page 360

    Q: What is front axle reserve capacity, and how do I calculate it? A: Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between your front gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and the front axle weight of your vehicle with full fuel and passengers. Basically, it is the amount of weight you can add to your front axle before reaching your front GAWR. The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire label, as shown. In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front axle, use the following formula: (W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle. Where: W = [...]

  • Page 361

    For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm) in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft (305 cm), then: W = 700 lb (318 kg) A = 4 ft (122 cm) W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm) (W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 980 lbs (445 kg) So, if your truck’s front axle reserve capacity is more than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR. Q: What if I want to add heavier equipment to my vehicle? A: You can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer passengers, less cargo, or by positionin[...]

  • Page 362

    Q: What is total vehicle reserve capacity? A: This is the difference between your GVWR and the weight of your truck with full fuel and passengers. It is the amount of weight you can add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR. Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are intended as a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo your truck can carry. If you are unsure of your vehicle’s front, rear, or total weight, go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can also help you with this. The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire label as shown previously. See your dealer for additional adv[...]

  • Page 363

    Truck-Camper Loading Information Notice: Installing a truck-camper to a vehicle that is equipped with the SS trim package could damage the vehicle. Do not install a truck-camper on a vehicle equipped with the SS trim package. A vehicle specific Truck-Camper Loading information label is attached to the inside of your vehicle’s glove box. This label will tell you if your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how much of a load your vehicle can carry, and how to correctly spread out the load. Also, it will help you match the right slide-in camper to your vehicle. When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of your vehicle is the weight of the camper, plus the following: • Everyth[...]

  • Page 364

    Here is an example of proper truck and camper match: A. Camper Center of Gravity B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s center of gravity (A) should fall within the truck’s recommended center of gravity zone (B) when installed. You must weigh any accessories or other equip[...]

  • Page 365

    Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the truck-camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the GAWRs. The total of the front and rear axle loads should not exceed your vehicle’s GVWR. These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door. See “Certification/Tire Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48 . If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings. When you install and load your slide-in camper, check the[...]

  • Page 366

    Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle will all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing, towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”. With the proper preparation and equipment, many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following. Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing: • What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure you rea[...]

  • Page 367

    Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle: 1. Shift an automatic transmission to PARK (P), or a manual transmission to FIRST (1). 2. Turn the engine of f, but leave the ignition on. 3. Firmly set the parking brake. 4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. { CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P) for an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is in gear, for a manual transmission. You or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. 5. Shift the transfer case to [...]

  • Page 368

    Dolly Towing Front Towing (Front Wheels Of f the Ground) Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, you must tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this section for more information. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicl[...]

  • Page 369

    { CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P) for an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is in gear, for a manual transmission. You or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. 6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-36 for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for your vehicle. 7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle. 8. Turn the ignition of f and lock the steering column. Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Of f [...]

  • Page 370

    Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from the rear: 1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly. 2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-49 3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in FIRST (1). 4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle. For manual transmission vehicles, make sure the wheels are straight before proceeding to the next steps. On automatic transmission vehicles, use an adequate clamping device to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. { CAUTION: Shifting a four-w[...]

  • Page 371

    Towing a Trailer Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle Break-In on page 2-20 for more information. { CAUTION: If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice i[...]

  • Page 372

    If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer Notice: Pulling a fifth-wheel trailer with a vehicle that is equipped with the SS trim package could damage the vehicle. Do not pull a fifth-wheel trailer with a vehicle equipped with the SS trim package. If you do, here are some important points: • There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. • Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later in this section. • Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your[...]

  • Page 373

    Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul is a feature on automatic transmission equipped vehicles that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-30 for more information. Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in the section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions: • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain. • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traff ic. • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy loa[...]

  • Page 374

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR C-1500 Regular Cab Short Box (2WD)* 4300 V6 (Auto) 3.23 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 4300 V6 (Manual) 3.23 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 855 kg) 4800 V8 (Auto) 3.23 3.73 6,400 lbs (2 903 kg) 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 994 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 4800 V8 (Manual) 3.23 3.73 4,400 lbs (1 996 kg) 5,400 lbs (2 449 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg) 5300 V8 3.23 3.73 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg) 8,400 lbs (3 810 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) * Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg) maximum. Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight G[...]

  • Page 375

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR C-1500 HD (2WD)* 6000 V8 3.73 4.10 8,300 lbs (3 765 kg) 10,300 lbs (4 672 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) * Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 2,500 lbs (1 133 kg) maximum. Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR C-1500 Crew Cab (2WD)* 5300 V8 3.23 3.73 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 6000 V8 3.73 10,100 lbs (4 581 kg) 15,500 lbs (7 031 kg) *Fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailering is neither designed nor intended for this vehicle Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR C-1500 Regular Cab Long Box (2WD)* 4300 V6[...]

  • Page 376

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR C-1500 Extended Cab Long Box (2WD)* 4800 V8 (Auto) 3.23 3.73 5,800 lbs (2 631 kg) 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 994 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 448 kg) 4800 V8 (Manual) 3.23 3.73 3,800 lbs (1 724 kg) 4,800 lbs (2 177 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 086 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg) 5300 V8 3.42 3.73 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 448 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 902 kg) * Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg) maximum. Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-1500 Regular Cab Short Box (4WD) 4300 V6 (Auto) 3.73 5,100 lbs (2 313 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg) 4300 V6 (Manual) 3.73 4,[...]

  • Page 377

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-1500 Extended Cab Short Box (4WD)* 4800 V8 (Auto) 3.42 3.73 4.10 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)** 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 4800 V8 (Manual) 3.42 3.73 4.10 4,700 lbs (2 132 kg) 4,700 lbs (2 132 kg) 5,700 lbs (2 585 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg) 5300 V8 3.42 3.73 4.10 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)** 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)** 8,700 lbs (3 946 kg)** 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) ** Maximum weight 7,700 lbs. (3 492 kg) for fifth-wheel or gooseneck. K-1500 HD (4WD)* 6000 V8 3.73 4.10 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 9,900 lb[...]

  • Page 378

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-1500 Regular Cab Long Box (4WD)* 4300 V6 (Auto) 3.73 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 4300 V6 (Manual) 3.73 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 4800 V8 (Auto) 3.42 3.73 4.10 6,900 lbs (3 130 kg) 6,900 lbs (3 130 kg) 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 4800 V8 (Manual) 3.42 3.73 4.10 4,900 lbs (2 223 kg) 4,900 lbs (2 223 kg) 5,900 lbs (2 676 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg) 5300 V8 3.42 3.73 4.10 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)** 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) *Fifth-wheel or [...]

  • Page 379

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-1500 Extended Cab Long Box (4WD)* 4800 V8 3.42 3.73 4.10 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 6,500 lbs (2 948 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 4800 V8 (Manual) 3.42 3.73 4.10 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 11,000 lbs (4 990 kg) 5300 V8 3.42 3.73 4.10 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)** 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)** 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)** 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) *Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg) maximum. **Maximum weight [...]

  • Page 380

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR C-2500 Extended Cab Short Box HD (2WD)* 6000 V8 4.10 10,200 lbs (4 627 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 8100 V8 3.73 4.10 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 20,000 lbs (9 072 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 6.6L V8 Diesel 3.73 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) *Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin tongue weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) maximum. Fifth-wheel or gooseneck GCWR for 6.6L V8 Diesel 2500 HD models is 23,200 lbs (10 523 kg). Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR C-2500 Extended Cab Long Box HD (2WD)* 6000 V8 4.10 10,100 lbs (4 581 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 8100 V8 3.73 [...]

  • Page 381

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR C-2500 Crew Cab Long Box HD (2WD) 6000 V8 4.10 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 8100 V8 3.73 4.10 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 20,000 lbs (9 072 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 6.6L V8 Diesel 3.73 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) *Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) maximum. Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-1500 HD (4WD)* 6000 V8 3.73 4.10 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 9,900 lbs (4 491 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) *Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weigh[...]

  • Page 382

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-2500 Extended Cab Short Box HD (4WD)* 6000 V8 4.10 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 8100 V8 3.73 4.10 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 20,000 lbs (9 072 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 6.6L V8 Diesel 3.73 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) *Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) maximum. Fifth-wheel or gooseneck GCWR for 6.6L V8 Diesel 2500 HD models is 23,200 lbs (10 523 kg). Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-2500 Extended Cab Long Box HD (4WD)* 6000 V8 4.10 9,900 lbs (4 490 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 8100 V8 3.73 4.10 12,[...]

  • Page 383

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-2500 Crew Cab Long Box HD (4WD) 6000 V8 4.10 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 8100 V8 3.73 4.10 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 20,000 lbs (9 072 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 6.6L V8 Diesel 3.73 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) * Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) maximum. Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR C-3500 Extended Cab (2WD) 6000 V8 4.10 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 8100 V8 4.10 12,000 lbs (5 543 kg)** 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 6.6L V8 Diesel (Manual) 3.73 12,000 lbs (5 543 kg)** 23,500 lbs (10 659 [...]

  • Page 384

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-3500 Regular Cab (4WD) 6000 V8 Dual Rear Wheel 4.10 9,800 lbs (4 445 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 6000 V8 Single Rear Wheel 4.10 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) 8100 V8 Dual Rear Wheel 4.10 15,400 lbs (6 985 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 8100 V8 Single Rear Wheel 4.10 15,600 lbs (7 067 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 6.6L V8 Dual Rear Wheel (Auto) 3.73 16,700 lbs (7 575 kg) 23,500 lbs (10 659 kg) 6.6L V8 Dual Rear Wheel (Manual) 3.73 16,700 lbs (7 575 kg) 23,500 lbs (10 659 kg) 6.6L V8 Single Rear Wheel 3.73 15,400 lbs (6 985 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) K-3500 Extended Cab (4WD)* 6000 V8 Dual Rear Wheel 4.10 9,400 lbs (4 264 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 25[...]

  • Page 385

    Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR K-3500 Crew Cab (4WD)* 6000 V8 Dual Rear Wheel 4.10 9,200 lbs (4 173 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 264 kg) 6000 V8 Single Rear Wheel 4.10 9,400 lbs (4 264 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 264 kg) 8100 V8 Dual Rear Wheel 4.10 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 8100 V8 Single Rear Wheel 4.10 12,000 lbs (5 443kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 6.6L V8 Diesel Single Rear Wheel (Auto) 3.73 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 6.6L V8 Diesel Single Rear Wheel (Manual) 3.73 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 22,000 lbs (9 979 kg) 6.6L V8 Diesel Dual Rear Wheel (Auto) 3.73 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 23,500 lbs (10 659 kg) 6.6L V8 Diesel Dual Rear Wheel (Manual) 3.73 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 2[...]

  • Page 386

    Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48 for more information ab[...]

  • Page 387

    Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight. Consider the following example: A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be: You can expect tongue weight to be a[...]

  • Page 388

    The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg). It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer. Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to [...]

  • Page 389

    If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailering Notice: Pulling a fifth-wheel trailer with a vehicle that is equipped with the SS trim package could damage the vehicle. Do not pull a fifth-wheel trailer with a vehicle equipped with the SS trim package. Fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers can be used wi[...]

  • Page 390

    Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if: • The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure. • The trailer’s brake system will use less than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes. If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at the p[...]

  • Page 391

    Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself. Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your elect[...]

  • Page 392

    Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to u[...]

  • Page 393

    Parking on Hills { CAUTION: You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) yet for an automatic transmission, or into gear for a manual transmission. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an automat[...]

  • Page 394

    When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you: • Start your engine • Shift into a gear • Release the parking brake 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4 for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and brake system. Ea[...]

  • Page 395

    If your trailer is equipped with electric brakes, you can get a jumper harness (electric trailer brake control) with a trailer battery feed fuse from your dealer. If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard four-way round pin connector, you can also get an adapter from your dealer. Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Harness Package For vehicles equipped with heavy duty trailering, the harness is connected to the trailer mounted to the hitch platform. The eight-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits: • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal • Brown: Taillamps • White: Ground • Light Green: Back-up Lamps • Light Blue: CHMSL* • Red: Batt[...]

  • Page 396

    Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring Package Notice: Pulling a fifth-wheel trailer with a vehicle that is equipped with the SS trim package could damage the vehicle. Do not pull a fifth-wheel trailer with a vehicle equipped with the SS trim package. The eight-wire camper harness is located under the front edge of the pickup box on the driver’s side of the vehicle, attached to the frame bracket. A connector will have to be added to the wiring harness which connects to the camper. The eight-wire harness contains the following camper/trailer circuits: • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal • Brown: Taillamps • White: Ground • Light Green: Back-up Lamps ?[...]

  • Page 397

    Electric Brake Control Jumper { CAUTION: Be sure to use only the correct trailer brake harness, the one intended for use on your vehicle. If you use some other trailer brake harness, even if it seems to fit, your trailer brakes may not work at all. You could have a crash in which you or others could be injured. Use only the trailer brake harness intended for your vehicle. If it is no longer available to you, be sure to get a proper replacement from your dealer. This harness is included with your vehicle as part of the heavy-duty trailer wiring package. This harness is for an electric brake controller and includes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installed by your dealer or a quali?[...]

  • Page 398

    Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery provision can be used to supply electrical power to additional equipment that you may choose to add, such as a slide-in camper. If your vehicle has this provision, this relay will be located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle, next to the auxiliary battery. When using this provision, connection should only be made to the upper stud (A) of the relay. Do not make connections to the lower stud (B) of the relay. The auxiliary battery circuit is protected by a megafuse located behind the auxiliary battery. Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment that you install. Notice: Leaving electrical[...]

  • Page 399

    Trailer Recommendations You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the spring bars in place. You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes. For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-67 . Power Take-Of f (PTO) Before using a Power Take-Off (PTO), if equipped, refer to the manufacturer’s or installer’s instructions. To engage a PTO on a vehicle with a manual transmission do the following: 1. Hold [...]

  • Page 400

    To use PTO speed control in Preset Mode (Factory Setting) do the following: 1. Engage the PTO. 2. Select PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) range. Apply the parking brake if NEUTRAL (N) is selected. Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) is not available in NEUTRAL (N) and is available only in PARK (P) when engine speed is above 1,100 rpm. 3. Make sure your foot is of f the brake pedal (and of f the clutch on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission). 4. Select the desired engine speed for PTO operation. Read the following preset mode information regarding operation. Preset Mode: PTO speed control mode is used for stationary applications. (PTO will remain engaged while mobile in the preset mode, however PTO[...]

  • Page 401

    Variable Mode: PTO speed control mode can be used for both stationary and mobile applications. This mode allows PTO to be controlled in a fashion similar to how cruise control sets vehicle speed. The operator can set to an rpm (between 800 and 2,200) with the cruise control feature or with the SET position on the PTO switch. The operator is then able to increase rpm in increments of 100, or “tap up” with the resume position on the cruise control. The operator can also decrease rpm in increments of 100 with the SET switch on the PTO or the cruise control. Vehicles not equipped with cruise control will not have the “tap up” capability. All engine speed values listed above are factory p[...]

  • Page 402

    ✍ NOTES 4-98[...]

  • Page 403

    Service ........................................................... .5-4 Accessories and Modifications ......................... .5-4 California Proposition 65 Warning .................... .5-4 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................ .5-5 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle ............................................. .5-5 Fuel ............................................................... .5-6 Gasoline Octane ........................................... .5-6 Gasoline Specifications ................................... .5-6 California Fuel .............................................. .5-7 Additives ...................................................... .5-7 Fuel [...]

  • Page 404

    Bulb Replacement ......................................... .5-62 Halogen Bulbs ............................................. .5-62 Headlamps ................................................. .5-62 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime Running Lamps ........................................ .5-64 Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... .5-66 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp ............................................ .5-67 Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker Lamps .......................................... .5-69 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ........................................ .5-69 Replacement Bulbs ..................[...]

  • Page 405

    Tires ........................................................ .5-120 Sheet Metal Damage .................................. .5-120 Underbody Maintenance .............................. .5-120 Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. .5-121 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... .5-121 Vehicle Identification .................................... .5-122 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............... .5-122 Service Parts Identification Label .................. .5-123 Electrical System ......................................... .5-123 Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................ .5-123 Windshield Wiper Fuses .............................. .5-123 Power Window[...]

  • Page 406

    Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Accessories and Modifications When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety, including such things as, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control and stability control. Some of these accessories may even cause malfunction or [...]

  • Page 407

    Doing Your Own Service Work { CAUTION: You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it. • Be sure you have suff icient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts, and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task. • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. If you want to do some of your own service work, you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order[...]

  • Page 408

    Fuel If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel Fuel Requirements and Fuel System” in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Supplement. For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this. Gasoline The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN) shows the code letter or number that identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on page 5-122 . If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-8 . In all other gasoline engines, use only regular unleaded gasoline. Ga[...]

  • Page 409

    California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-45 . If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, re[...]

  • Page 410

    Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN) shows the code letter or number that identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on page 5-122 . If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z only), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel on page 5-6 . In all other engines, including the 5.3L V8 (VIN Code T), use only regular unleaded gasoline. Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z) may use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). General Motors encourages the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed[...]

  • Page 411

    E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will need to refill your fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline. Regular unleaded gasoline is recommended when pulling a trailer. For payload capacity with ethanol fuel, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48 . Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and may harm your fuel system. Damage caused by additives would not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. Do not use additives with E85 fuel. Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts. That[...]

  • Page 412

    Filling the Tank { CAUTION: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off your engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. It wi[...]

  • Page 413

    If your vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cab model, and it runs out of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first to ensure a quick restart. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-118 . When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evapor[...]

  • Page 414

    Filling a Portable Fuel Container { CAUTION: Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: • Dispense gasoline only into approved containers. • Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground. • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. • Do not smoke while pumping gasoline. Checking [...]

  • Page 415

    Hood Release To open the hood do the following: 1. Pull the handle with this symbol on it. It is located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering wheel. 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the secondary hood release located near the center of the grille. 3. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then pull down the hood and close it firmly. 5-13[...]

  • Page 416

    Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 4.3L V6 engine, here is what you will see: 5-14[...]

  • Page 417

    A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 5-25 . B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Engine Coolant on page 5-35 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-37 . C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 5-25 . D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-20 . E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid (Except Allison Transmission ® ) on page 5-27 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (Allison Transmission ® ) on page 5-30 . F. Engine Cooling[...]

  • Page 418

    When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine (4.8L and 6.0L V8 engines similar), here is what you will see: 5-16[...]

  • Page 419

    A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 5-25 . B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Engine Coolant on page 5-35 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-37 . C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 5-25 . D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-20 . E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid (Except Allison Transmission ® ) on page 5-27 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (Allison Transmission ® ) on page 5-30 . F. Engine Oil Fil[...]

  • Page 420

    When you open the hood on the 8.1L V8 engine, here is what you will see: 5-18[...]

  • Page 421

    A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 5-25 . B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Engine Coolant on page 5-35 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-37 . C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 5-25 . D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-20 . E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid (Except Allison Transmission ® ) on page 5-27 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (Allison Transmission ® ) on page 5-30 . F. Engine Oil Fil[...]

  • Page 422

    Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine Oil” in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Engine Supplement. If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light appears on the instrument cluster (except vehicles equipped with the 4.3L engine), it means you need to check your engine oil level right away. For more information, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-51 . You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder. Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See Engine[...]

  • Page 423

    When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-132 . Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the w[...]

  • Page 424

    What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things: • GM6094M Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. • SAE 5W-30 As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You should look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as me[...]

  • Page 425

    If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below − 20°F ( − 29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine t[...]

  • Page 426

    How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, reset the system. To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine of f. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for 10 seconds, the system is resetting. 3. Turn the key to LOCK. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message com[...]

  • Page 427

    Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Pickup Models” under “Engine Air Cleaner/Filter” in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Supplement for the correct inspection and replacement procedures. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter and the air filter restriction indicator, if equipped. When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter If your vehicle is equipped with an air filter restriction indicator, it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/ filter needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction indicator, you should inspect the air filter restriction indicator at every oil change a[...]

  • Page 428

    Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction Indicator 1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly on the front corner of the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. 2. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing and lift up the cover. 3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible. 4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and the housing. 5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. 6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws. 7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if equipped, by pressing the top button on the indicator. 5-26[...]

  • Page 429

    { CAUTION: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off. Automatic Transmission Fluid (Except Allison Transmission ® ) When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-7 , and be su[...]

  • Page 430

    Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during this cold check, you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the [...]

  • Page 431

    3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area, below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading. 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings persist, check the transmission breather hose to be sure [...]

  • Page 432

    Automatic Transmission Fluid (Allison Transmission ® ) When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-7 , and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-14 . How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little diff icult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a fals[...]

  • Page 433

    Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: Cold Check Procedure The purpose of the cold check is to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check can be made. The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases. Do not fill above the COLD CHECK band if the transmission fluid is below normal operating temperatures. 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. 3. Check the fluid level reading. Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading. 4. If the fluid level is within the COLD CHECK band, the transmission may be oper[...]

  • Page 434

    Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedures described previously. Consistency (repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If inconsistent readings persist, check the transmission breather to be sure it is clean and unclogged. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer. How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-14 . Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid level is low, add[...]

  • Page 435

    How to Check Manual Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little diff icult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading. Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place, and the transm[...]

  • Page 436

    How to Add Manual Transmission Fluid Here is how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-14 . 1. Remove the filler plug. 2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated. Hydraulic Clutch The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid. It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system. Addin[...]

  • Page 437

    How to Check and Add Fluid The proper fluid should be added if the level does not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it is in place in the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap. Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL ® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL ® extended life coolant. The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 5-37 . A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant w[...]

  • Page 438

    What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL ® coolant which will not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do not need to add anything else. { CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® co[...]

  • Page 439

    If your vehicle is equipped with a low coolant sensor and the LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes on and stays on, it means you are low on engine coolant. See “LOW COOLANT LEVEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-54 . Adding Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL ® coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the engine is cool. { CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is hand-tight and fully seated. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice: If the pressure cap is [...]

  • Page 440

    If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine { CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode (V8 Engines Only) on page 5-40 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. N[...]

  • Page 441

    If you get the ENGINE COOLANT HOT message with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it of f. 2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the windows as necessary. 3. If you are in a traf f ic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving — DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3). If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, park, and fast idle your vehicle right away. If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is equipped wit[...]

  • Page 442

    Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode (V8 Engines Only) If an overheated engine condition exists and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided. Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oil will be severely [...]

  • Page 443

    A. Coolant Surge Tank B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C. Engine Cooling Fan { CAUTION: An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface. Check the coolant level after the system cools down. Some amount of coolant may be lost due to overheating. The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhe[...]

  • Page 444

    { CAUTION: Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with an electric engine cooling fan, check the coolant temperature gage. If the coolant temperature is approximately 232°F (111°C), the electric cooling fan should be running. If it is not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine. If your vehicle is equipped with an engine-driven cooling fan, start the engine again and see if the f[...]

  • Page 445

    If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as follows: { CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. { CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle?[...]

  • Page 446

    { CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. 1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it. 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, to the FULL COLD mark. 5-44[...]

  • Page 447

    4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap of f, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark. 5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. Engine Fan Noise If your vehicle is equipped with a clutched engine cooling fan, when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower[...]

  • Page 448

    Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for reservoir location. When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid, do the following: 1. Turn the key of f and let the engine compartment cool down. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 5. Remove the cap again and look[...]

  • Page 449

    Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has suff icient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle. When the CHECK WASHER FLUID message is displayed, you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See[...]

  • Page 450

    Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not work at all. So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid. Adding [...]

  • Page 451

    Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be above MIN. If it is not, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak. After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark. What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-14 . Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. { CAUTION: With[...]

  • Page 452

    Brake Wear Your vehicle has front disc brakes and may have rear drum brakes or rear disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly. { CAUTION: The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes will not work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates may cause a bra[...]

  • Page 453

    Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system — for example, when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance you have come to expect can c[...]

  • Page 454

    Jump Starting If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. { CAUTION: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: • They contain acid that can burn you. • They contain gas that can explode or ignite. • They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damag[...]

  • Page 455

    3. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL. Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories on during [...]

  • Page 456

    { CAUTION: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. { CAUTION: Fans or other moving engine p[...]

  • Page 457

    7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 9. Now connect the black negative ( − ) cable to the negative ( − ) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative ( − ) terminal if the vehicle has one. The vehicle’s remote negative (–) terminal is marked GND. 10. Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative ( − ) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goe[...]

  • Page 458

    Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative ( − ) Terminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative ( − ) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle that had the bad battery. 2. Disconnect the black negat[...]

  • Page 459

    Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour or two. Remember that the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading. How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. • The proper level for the 1500 Series is from 5/8 inch to 1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole. • The proper leve[...]

  • Page 460

    Four-Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles. There are two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. How to Check Lubricant Manual Transfer Case 5-58[...]

  • Page 461

    To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug. When to Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4 . What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-14 . Automatic Transfer Case 5-59[...]

  • Page 462

    Front Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the front axle, you may need to add some lubricant: • When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 0 to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) below the filler plug hole. • When the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fi[...]

  • Page 463

    Noise Control System Tampering with Noise Control System Prohibited The following information relates to compliance with federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule provides information on maintaining the noise control system to minimize degradation of the noise emission control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise control system warranty is given in your warranty booklet. These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the United States. Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof: 1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purpo[...]

  • Page 464

    Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-71 . For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer. Halogen Bulbs { CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. Headlamps To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following: 1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-13 for more information. 2. Remove the pin on the headlamp assembly by turning the pin up and pulling it straight out. 5-62[...]

  • Page 465

    3. Pull the headlamp assembly out. A. Low-Beam Headlamp B. High-Beam Headlamp 4. Unplug the electrical connector. 5. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp assembly. 6. Put the new bulb into the assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight. 7. Plug in the electrical connector. 8. Reinstall the headlamp assembly. 9. Install the pin and turn it into the locking feature. 5-63[...]

  • Page 466

    Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime Running Lamps To replace a front turn signal, sidemarker, or DRL bulb, do the following: 1. Remove the headlamp assembly as mentioned previously. See Headlamps on page 5-62 for more information. 2. Press the retainer clip (arrow), located behind the turn signal assembly, towards the outside of the vehicle. 3. Pull the turn signal assembly out from the vehicle. 5-64[...]

  • Page 467

    A. Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) B. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp C. Sidemarker Lamp 4. Press the locking release lever (the sidemarker lamp does not have a locking release lever), turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove it from the turn signal assembly. 5. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket. 6. Install a new bulb into the bulb socket. 7. Reinstall the bulb socket into the turn signal assembly and turn it clockwise until it locks (the sidemarker lamps does not lock into place). 8. Reinstall the turn signal assembly back onto the vehicle placing the hook and posts on the inner side into the alignment holes first and then the outer side into the retainer bracket. Push until you h[...]

  • Page 468

    Roof Marker Lamps To replace a roof marker lamp bulb, do the following: 1. Remove the two screws and lift off the lens. 2. Install a new bulb into the socket and turn clockwise until it locks into place. 3. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws. 5-66[...]

  • Page 469

    To replace a center roof marker lamp bulb, do the following: 1. Remove the six screws from the center roof marker lamp assembly. 2. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise to remove it from the socket. 3. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp To replace one of these bulbs, do the following: 1. Remove the screws and lift of f the lamp assembly. 5-67[...]

  • Page 470

    A. Cargo Lamp B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb 2. Remove the back plate from the assembly by pressing the release tabs. 3. Remove the CHMSL bulb by pulling the bulb straight out from the holder back plate. Remove a cargo bulb by turning the socket counterclockwise and pulling the bulb straight out. 4. If a CHMSL bulb is replaced, put the new bulb into the socket and press it in until it is tight. If a cargo lamp is replaced, put a new cargo lamp bulb into the socket and press it in until it is tight before turning the socket counterclockwise. 5. Reinstall the back plate into the lamp assembly. 6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws. 5-68[...]

  • Page 471

    Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker Lamps To replace a pickup box identification or fender marker lamp bulb, do the following: 1. Remove the screws and lamp assembly. 2. Unplug the lamp assembly harness. 3. Gently pry the individual lamp from the lamp assembly. 4. Unplug the lamp. 5. Plug in a new lamp and snap it into the assembly. 6. Reinstall the lamp assembly. Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps To replace one of these bulbs, do the following: 1. Open the tailgate. Tailgate on page 2-14 for more information. 2. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws near the tailgate latch and pull out the lamp assembly. 5-69[...]

  • Page 472

    3. Determine which of the following taillamp assembly applies to your vehicle. A. Stoplamp/Taillamp B. Turn Signal C. Back-up Lamp A. Stoplamp/Taillamp B. Turn Signal Lamp C. Back-up Lamp D. Sidemarker Lamp 4. Press the release tab, if equipped, and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly. 5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket. 6. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly. 7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. 5-70[...]

  • Page 473

    Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models) A. Turn Signal Lamp B. Taillamp/Stoplamp C. Back-up Lamp To replace one of these bulbs, do the following: 1. Peel the rubber seal away from the lens using your hands. 2. Lift the lens of f the lamp assembly. 3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket. 4. Install a new bulb into the socket and press it in until it is tight. 5. Reinstall the lens and the lens seal. Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back-up Lamp 3157 Back-up Lamp* 1156 Cargo Lamp and Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 912 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 4114K Fender Marker, Front Roof Marker and Sidemarker Lamp (If Equipped) 194 Front Parking and Turn Lamp 3457A Headlamps High-Beam [...]

  • Page 474

    Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4 for more information. Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts (Gasoline Engines) on page 6-17 . To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the following: 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. 2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C). 3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the release lever click into place. 5-72[...]

  • Page 475

    Tires Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual. { CAUTION: Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. • Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48 . CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting ac[...]

  • Page 476

    Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall. (A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guideli[...]

  • Page 477

    (A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration. For information on reco[...]

  • Page 478

    Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size. (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digi[...]

  • Page 479

    Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its width. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by ste[...]

  • Page 480

    Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight; a[...]

  • Page 481

    Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-85 . UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear. Rati[...]

  • Page 482

    Inflation - Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following: • Too much flexing • Too much heat • Tire overloading • Premature or irregular wear • Poor handling • Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you can get the following: • Unusual wear • Poor handling • Rough ride • Needless damage from road hazards A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s d[...]

  • Page 483

    Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. High Speed Operation (SS Silverado) { CAUTION: Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/[...]

  • Page 484

    Dual Tire Operation When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque and wheel nut tightening information, see Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-94 . The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically, see Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-82 . Also see Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-4 . { CAUTION: If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is badly underinflated, the tire can overheat. An ove[...]

  • Page 485

    If your vehicle has single rear wheels and the tread design for your front tires is the same as your rear tires, use the rotation pattern shown here when rotating your tires. If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design for your front tires is the same as your rear tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here when rotating your tires. 5-83[...]

  • Page 486

    If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread design for the front tires is different from the dual rear tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here when rotating your tires. The dual tires are rotated as a pair, and the inside rear tires become the outside rear tires. When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side are lined up. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48 . Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on pag[...]

  • Page 487

    When It Is Time for New Tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators. You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: • You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. • You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. • The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. • The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the si[...]

  • Page 488

    Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires. GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and [...]

  • Page 489

    { CAUTION: If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires. Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label. This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48 , for more info[...]

  • Page 490

    Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traff ic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 t[...]

  • Page 491

    Temperature – A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The tempe[...]

  • Page 492

    Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. { CAUTION: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nut[...]

  • Page 493

    Tire Chains { CAUTION: If your vehicle has dual wheels or P265/75R16, LT265/75R16, P265/70R17 or P275/55R20 size tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehic[...]

  • Page 494

    If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traff ic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid.[...]

  • Page 495

    { CAUTION: Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. You and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R). 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear – not in NEUTRAL. 4. Turn of f the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised. 5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) To be even more[...]

  • Page 496

    Removing the Spare Tire and Tools A. Knob B. Retaining Hook C. Wheel Blocks D. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks E. Jack A. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks B. Wheel Blocks C. Retaining Bracket and Wing Nut D. Tool Kit and Jack Tools E. Retaining Hook F. Jack G. Knob 1500 Crew Cab Regular Cab and Crew Cab (Except 1500 Crew Cab) 5-94[...]

  • Page 497

    A. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks B. Wheel Blocks C. Retaining Hook D. Jack E. Knob F. Retaining Bracket and Wing Nut G. Tool Kit and Jack Tools A. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks B. Wheel Blocks C. Jack D. Retaining Hook E. Knob F. Retaining Bracket and Wing Nut G. Tool Kit and Jack Tools For regular cab models, the equipment you will need is behind the passenger’s seat. For extended and crew cab models, the equipment is on the shelf behind the passenger’s side second row seat. Extended Cab Extended Cab Short Box 5-95[...]

  • Page 498

    1. If there is a cover, move the seats forward and turn the wing nut on the cover counterclockwise to remove it. For crew cab models, pull up the second row seat with the loop at the base of the seat cushion to access the tools. 2. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head to release the jack from its holder. 3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise. 4. Remove the wing nut used to retain the storage bag and tools by turning it counterclockwise. You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire. A. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down) B. Hoist Assembly C. Hoist[...]

  • Page 499

    1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the ignition key to remove the lock, if equipped with a spare tire lock (J). 2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack handle extensions (I) as shown. 3. Insert the hoist end (open end) (F) of the extension through the hole (G) in the rear bumper. Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire. 4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the secondary [...]

  • Page 500

    5. Use the wheel wrench hook which allows you to pull the hoist cable towards you to assist in reaching the spare tire. 6. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when the tire has been lowered, so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening. 7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Use the following pictures and instructions to remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle. The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E). 5-98[...]

  • Page 501

    1. If your vehicle has wheel nut caps, loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nut caps, the wheel nut caps are designed to stay with the center cap after they are loosened. Remove the entire center cap. If the wheel has a smooth center cap, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel, and gently pry it out. 5-99[...]

  • Page 502

    2. Use the wheel wrench and turn it counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. A. Front Location (Two-Wheel-Drive 1500 Series) B. Front Location (All Other Series) C. Rear Location (All Series) 3. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (two-wheel-drive 1500 Series vehicles), position the jack under the bracket attached to the vehicle’s frame, behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (all other models), position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack under the rear axle between the spring anchor and the shock absor[...]

  • Page 503

    { CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. { CAUTION: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. Front Position - 2WD 1500 Series 5-101[...]

  • Page 504

    4. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the rear axle is resting securely between the grooves that are on the jack head. 5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well. Front Position - All Other Models Rear Position 5-102[...]

  • Page 505

    6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. { CAUTION: Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. 7. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. 5-103[...]

  • Page 506

    8. Install the spare tire. { CAUTION: Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident. 9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. 10. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held against the hub. Front Position - All Models 5-104[...]

  • Page 507

    11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely. Front Position - 2WD 1500 Series Rear Position 5-105[...]

  • Page 508

    { CAUTION: Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-132 for wheel nut torque specification. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Cap[...]

  • Page 509

    Secondary Latch System Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-110 . { CAUTION: Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions. Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the instructions listed below. To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do the following: 1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable e[...]

  • Page 510

    4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-94 . 5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. 6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with the backs facing each other. 7. Place the bottom edge of the jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B), separating them so that the jack is balanced securely. 8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the rear bumper. 5-108[...]

  • Page 511

    9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. 10. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting. 11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place. The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. 12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable. { CAUTION: Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side[...]

  • Page 512

    15. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle. 16. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle. Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been replaced. To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-98 . Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools { CAUTION: Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equip[...]

  • Page 513

    Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier. Use the following art and text to assist you: A. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down) B. Hoist Assembly C. Hoist Cable D. Tire Retainer E. Hoist Shaft F. Hoist End of Extension Tool G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole H. Wheel Wrench I. Jack Handle Extensions J. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped) 1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear. 2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I) together. 5-111[...]

  • Page 514

    4. Insert the hoist end (F) through the hole (G) in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft. 5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening. 6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable. 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock (if equipped). 5-112[...]

  • Page 515

    To store the jack and jack tools, do the following: A. Wing Nut B. Wheel Blocks C. Retaining Bracket and Wing Nut D. Wheel Wrench and Extensions E. Tool Bag F. Mounting Bracket G. Jack H. Retaining Hook 1. Put the tools (D) in the tool bag (E) and place them in the retaining bracket (C). 2. Tighten down the wing nut (C). 3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B) and jack (G) together with the wing nut (A) and retaining hook (H). 4. Position the jack (G) in the mounting bracket (F). Position the holes in the base of the jack (G) onto the pin in the mounting bracket (F). 5. Return them to their original location in the vehicle. For more information, refer to Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-[...]

  • Page 516

    Spare Tire Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-80 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-48 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-98 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-110 . Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires originally installed on your vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. I[...]

  • Page 517

    Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to your home furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle’s interior. When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth. Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch the glass. When clean[...]

  • Page 518

    Fabric/Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques: • For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed. • For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and then vacuum. To clean, use the following instructions: 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with wate[...]

  • Page 519

    Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. So[...]

  • Page 520

    Washing Your Vehicle The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention, and durability. The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-121 . Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not [...]

  • Page 521

    Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually needed. However, you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary. Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts. Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the w[...]

  • Page 522

    Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. Tires To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or t[...]

  • Page 523

    Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description Usage Polishing Cloth Wax-Treated Interior and exterior polishing cloth. Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, [...]

  • Page 524

    Description Usage Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks, fine scratches, and other light surface contamination. Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and protects finish. Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Cleans, shines, and protects in one step. No wiping necessary. Wash Wax Concentrate Medium foaming shampoo. Cleans and lightly waxes. Biodegradable and phosphate free. Spot Lifter Quickly removes spots and stains from carpets, vinyl, and cloth upholstery. Odor Eliminator Odorless spray odor eliminator used on fabrics, vinyl, leather and carpet. Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner[...]

  • Page 525

    Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine, specifications, and replacement parts. Service Parts Identification Label You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label, you will find the following: • VIN • Model designation • Paint information • Production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. Electrical System Add-On Electrical Equipment Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage y[...]

  • Page 526

    Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If you ever have a problem on [...]

  • Page 527

    Fuses Usage RR WPR Not Used SEO ACCY Special Equipment Option Accessory WS WPR Windshield Wipers TBC ACCY Truck Body Controller Accessory IGN 3 Ignition, Heated Seats Fuses Usage 4WD Four-Wheel Drive System, Auxiliary Battery HTR A/C Climate Control System LOCK (Relay) Power Door Lock Relay (Lock Function) HVAC 1 Climate Control System LT DR Driver’s Door Harness Connection CRUISE Cruise Control, Power Take Off (PTO) UNLCK (Relay) Power Door Lock Relay (Unlock Function) RR FOG LP Not Used BRAKE Anti-Lock Brake System DRIVER UNLCK Power Door Lock Relay (Driver’s Door Unlock Function) IGN 0 TCM TBC IGN 0 Truck Body Controller VEH CHMSL Vehicle and Trailer High Mounted Stoplamp LT TRLR ST/T[...]

  • Page 528

    Fuses Usage LT TRN Left Turn Signals and Sidemarkers VEH STOP Vehicle Stoplamps, Brake Module, Electronic Throttle Control Module RT TRLR ST/TRN Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer RT TRN Right Turn Signals and Sidemarkers BODY Harness Connector DDM Driver Door Module AUX PWR 2, M/GATE Not Used LCKS Power Door Lock System ECC, TPM Tire Pressure Monitoring System TBC 2C Truck Body Controller HAZRD Flasher Module CB LT DRS Left Power Windows Circuit Breaker TBC 2B Truck Body Controller TBC 2A Truck Body Controller Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel utility block is located underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Device Usage SEO Special Equip[...]

  • Page 529

    Device Usage HDLR 2 Headliner Wiring Connector BODY Body Wiring Connector DEFOG Rear Defogger Relay HDLNR 1 Headliner Wiring Connector 1 SPARE RELAY Not Used CB SEAT Driver and Passenger Seat Module Circuit Breaker CB RT DOOR Right Power Windows Circuit Breaker SPARE Not Used INFO Infotainment Harness Connection Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the battery. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. To remove fuses hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more information on its location. 5-127[...]

  • Page 530

    5-128[...]

  • Page 531

    *1 Fuel Injection Rail #2-Gasoline Engine; Engine Control Module-Diesel Engine. *2 Fuel Injection Rail #1-Gasoline Engine; Actuator-Diesel Engine. *3 Oxygen Sensors-Gasoline Engine; Fuel Heater-Diesel Engine. *4 Oxygen Sensors-Gasoline Engine; Engine Control Module 1-Diesel Engine. *5 Ignition 1-Gasoline Engine; Engine Control Module-Diesel Engine. *6 Powertrain Control Module B-Gasoline Engine; Engine Control Module B-Diesel Engine. *7 Rear Climate Control. *8 Sunroof. Fuses Usage GLOW PLUG Diesel Glow Plugs and Intake Air Heater CUST FEED Gasoline Accessory Power HYBRID Hybrid STUD #1 Auxiliary Power (Single Battery and Diesels Only)/ Dual Battery (TP2) Do not install fuse. MBEC Mid Bussed[...]

  • Page 532

    Fuses Usage SEO B2 Off-Road Lamps 4WS Not Used AUX PWR Auxiliary Power Outlet — Console PCM 1 Powertrain Control Module ETC/ECM Electronic Throttle Control, Electronic Brake Controller-Gasoline Engine, Fan Clutch-Diesel Engines IGN E Instrument Panel Cluster, Air Conditioning Relay, Turn Signal/Hazard Switch, Starter Relay RTD Ride Control TRL B/U Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring F/PMP Fuel Pump (Relay) B/U LP Back-up Lamps, Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger HDLP-HI Headlamp High Beam Relay PRIME Not Used AIRBAG Supplemental Inflatable Restraint System FRT PARK Front Parking Lamps, Sidemarker Lamps Fuses Usage DRL Daytime Running Lamps (Relay) SEO I[...]

  • Page 533

    Fuses Usage LO HDLP-LT Headlamp Low Beam-Left BTSI Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System CRNK Starting System LO HDLP-RT Headlamp Low Beam-Right FOG LP Fog Lamps Relay FOG LP Fog Lamps HORN Horn Relay W/S WASH Windshield Washer Pump Relay W/S WASH Windshield Washer Pump INFO OnStar ® /Rear Seat Entertainment RADIO AMP Radio Amplifier RH HID Not Used HORN Horn EAP Not Used TREC Not Used SBA Supplemental Brake Assist Auxiliary Electric Cooling Fan Fuse Block The auxiliary electric cooling fan fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle next to the underhood fuse block. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Fuses Usage COOL/FAN Coolin[...]

  • Page 534

    Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-14 for more information. Application Capacities English Metric Cooling System 4.3L V6 Automatic with Front A/C* 14.8 qt 14.0 L 4.3L V6 Automatic with Front A/C** 16.5 qt 15.6 L 4.3L V6 Manual with Front A/C* 15.1 qt 14.3 L 4.3L V6 Manual with Front A/C** 16.6 qt 15.7 L 4.8L V8 Automatic with Front A/C* 15.2 qt 14.4 L 4.8L V8 Automatic with Front A/C** 16.8 qt 15.9 L 4.8L V8 Manual with Front A/C* 15.5 qt 14.7 L 4.8L V8 Manual with Front A/C** 17.0 qt 16.1 L 5.3L V8 Automatic with Front A/C* 15.2 qt 14.4 L 5.3L V8 Au[...]

  • Page 535

    Application Capacities English Metric Engine Oil with Filter 4.3 V6 4.5 qt 4.3 L 4.8 V8; 5.3 V8; 6.0 V8 6.0 qt 5.7 L 8.1 V8 6.5 qt 6.1 L Fuel Tank Short Bed and 2500 LD 26.0 gal 98.0 L Long Bed and Chassis Cab (Pickup Box Delete) 34.0 gal 128.7 L Chassis Cab 3500 and 3500HD — front 27.0 gal 102.0 L Chassis Cab 3500 and 3500HD — rear 23.0 gal 87.0 L Transfer Case Fluid 2.0 qt 1.9 L Wheel Nut Torque 140 ft lb 190 Y After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating range. 5-133[...]

  • Page 536

    Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap VORTEC™ 4.3L V6 X Automatic Manual 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) VORTEC™ 4.8L V8 V Automatic Manual 0.040 inches (1.01 mm) VORTEC™ 5.3L V8 Z Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm) VORTEC™ 5.3L V8 T Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm) VORTEC™ 6.0 V8 U Automatic Manual 0.040 inches (1.01 mm) VORTEC™ 6.0L V8 N Automatic Manual 0.040 inches (1.01 mm) VORTEC™ 8.1L V8 G Automatic Manual 0.060 inches (1.52 mm) 5-134[...]

  • Page 537

    Maintenance Schedule ..................................... .6-2 Introduction .................................................. .6-2 Maintenance Requirements ............................. .6-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... .6-2 Using the Maintenance Schedule ..................... .6-3 Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) ........ .6-4 Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine) ...................................... .6-7 Maintenance Footnotes (Gasoline Engine) ......... .6-9 Owner Checks and Services ......................... .6-11 At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) ...................... .6-11 At Each Fuel Fill ...................[...]

  • Page 538

    Maintenance Schedule Introduction This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Engine Supplement. Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended. Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details. Maintenance Requirements Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, replacement parts, and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage [...]

  • Page 539

    Using the Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your GM Goodwrench ® [...]

  • Page 540

    If you want to purchase service information, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-14 . Owner Checks and Services on page 6-11 tells you what should be checked, when to check it, and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-14 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts (Gasoline Engines) on page 6-17 . When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine GM parts. Scheduled M[...]

  • Page 541

    When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are required. Required services are described in the following for “Maintenance I ” and “Maintenance II .” Generally, it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance I , your second service be Maintenance II , and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more often. Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed. Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I .[...]

  • Page 542

    Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d) Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). •• Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed. •• Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in this section. •• Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). • Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). • Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). • Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). • Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). • Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. • Inspect shields, vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR[...]

  • Page 543

    Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine) This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Engine Supplement. The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service ( I or II ) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (41 500) 50,000 (83 000) 75,000 (125 000) 100,000 (166 000) 125,000 (207 500) 150,000 (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • ••• • Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components. • • ••• • Vehicles with[...]

  • Page 544

    Additional Required Services (cont’d) Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (41 500) 50,000 (83 000) 75,000 (125 000) 100,000 (166 000) 125,000 (207 500) 150,000 (240 000) Except Allison Transmission ® : Change automatic transmission fluid and filter (severe service). See footnote (h). ••• Except Allison Transmission ® : Change automatic transmission fluid and filter (normal service). • Four-wheel drive with automatic transfer case only: Change transfer case fluid. See footnote (g). ••• Inspect evaporative control system. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes † and (k). ••• Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. • [...]

  • Page 545

    Maintenance Footnotes (Gasoline Engine) This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Engine Supplement. † The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. # Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering linkage, transm[...]

  • Page 546

    (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door hinges, hood latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, tailgate hinges, tailgate linkage, tailgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak. (g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. (h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is over 8600 lbs or if the vehicle is mainly driven under[...]

  • Page 547

    Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability, and emission control performance of your vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench ® dealer can assist you with these checks and services. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) on page 6-14 . At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) Check dual wheel nut torque. For proper torque, see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-132 . At Each Fuel Fill It is import[...]

  • Page 548

    At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-49 . Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your GM Goodwrench ® dealer for service. Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check { CAUTION: Whe[...]

  • Page 549

    Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position. • The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). • The key should come out only in LOCK. Contact your GM Goodwrench ® dealer if service is required. Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on a fairly s[...]

  • Page 550

    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants (Gasoline Engine) This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Engine Supplement. Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification may be obtained from your dealer. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine Oil Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench ® oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-20 [...]

  • Page 551

    Usage Fluid/Lubricant Manual Transmission (5–Speed without Low Gear, RPO MG5) Synchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12345349, in Canada 10953465). Manual Transmission (6–Speed) Synthetic Transmission Fluid approved to Allison Transmission ® specification TES-295 (GM Part No. U.S. 12378515, in Canada 88900701). Automatic Transmission DEXRON ® -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Floor Shift Linkage Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Chassis Lubricati[...]

  • Page 552

    Usage Fluid/Lubricant Automatic Transfer Case AUTO-TRAK II Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378508, in Canada 10953626). Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One-Piece Propshaft Spline (Two-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.) Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in Canada 10953511) or lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830. Rear Driveline Center Spline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate Hinge and Linkage, Folding Seats, and Fuel Door[...]

  • Page 553

    Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts (Gasoline Engines) Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer. If your vehicle has a diesel engine see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX ® Diesel Engine Supplement. Part GM Part Number ACDelco ® Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter High Capacity 10368768 A1518C Standard 25311916* A1519C* Oil Filter 4.3L V6 25010792 PF47 4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 88984215 PF46 8.1L V8 25324052 PF454 Spark Plugs 4.3L V6 89017883 41-932 4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8 12571164 41-985 8.1L V8 12578277 41-983 Wiper Blades (ITTA Type) 22 inches (56.0 cm) 15153642 — *A1518C high-capacity air cleane[...]

  • Page 554

    Engine Drive Belt Routing V6 Engines V8 Engines 6-18[...]

  • Page 555

    Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 . Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-11 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-19[...]

  • Page 556

    Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-20[...]

  • Page 557

    Customer Assistance and Information .............. .7-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... .7-2 Online Owner Center ..................................... .7-3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... .7-4 Customer Assistance Off ices ........................... .7-4 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... .7-5 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... .7-6 Courtesy Transportation .................................. .7-7 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders ................................................. .7-9 Collision Damage Repair ............................... .7-10 Reporting Safety Defects ...[...]

  • Page 558

    Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, co[...]

  • Page 559

    The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you. You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address: BBB Auto Line[...]

  • Page 560

    Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Assistance Of fices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, refer to the addresses below. United States — Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170 www.Chevrol[...]

  • Page 561

    Overseas — Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift. The offer is available for a very limited [...]

  • Page 562

    Roadside Assistance Program As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance program. This value-added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA, (1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance representative. We will provide the following services during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense to you: • Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel ($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the nearest service station. • Lock-out Service (identification required[...]

  • Page 563

    While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service, it is added security while traveling for you and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872) , text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438 . Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence. Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notificati[...]

  • Page 564

    Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following: Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership. Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement of public transportation expenses ma[...]

  • Page 565

    Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details. General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion. Vehicle Data Co[...]

  • Page 566

    To read this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required. GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than: • with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, • in response to an off icial request of police or similar government off ice, • as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the discovery process, or • as required by law. In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may: • use the data for GM research needs, • make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is [...]

  • Page 567

    Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty. Repair Facility GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art equipment, or be able [...]

  • Page 568

    If an Accident Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident. • Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. • If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not leave the scene of an accident until all matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police off icer. • Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the accident. Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This[...]

  • Page 569

    Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty. Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with y[...]

  • Page 570

    Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to: Transport Canada Place de Ville Tower C 330 Sparks Street Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 D[...]

  • Page 571

    Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483). Owner’s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models. In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and Warranty Booklet. RETA[...]

  • Page 572

    ✍ NOTES 7-16[...]

  • Page 573

    A Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5 - 4 Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-18 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-54 Adding Equipment to Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle ....................................................... 1-86 Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5 - 7 Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-123 Air Cleaner/Filter , Engine ................................. 5-25 Air Conditioning .............................. 3-20, 3-21, 3-24 Airbag Off Light ..................................................... 3-34 Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-36 [...]

  • Page 574

    Audio System(s) (cont.) Radio with CD ............................................ 3-74 Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-99 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-125 Setting the T ime for Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-71 Setting the T ime for Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-71 Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-126 Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-128 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-130 Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-14 Automatic T ransmission Fluid .......................[...]

  • Page 575

    Cargo Lamp Light ........................................... 3-49 Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-76 Center Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts .... 1-25 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp ............................................... 5-67 Chains, T ire ................................................... 5-91 Check Engine Light ............................................... 3-45 Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-12 Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-121 Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37 Infants and Y oung Children ........................... 1-33 Lower A[...]

  • Page 576

    Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7 - 7 Customer Assistance for T ext T elephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7 - 4 Customer Assistance Off ices ........................... 7- 4 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7 - 2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7 - 5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ............................................ 7-14 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government ............................................ 7-13 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7 - 6 Service Publ[...]

  • Page 577

    E Electrical System Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-123 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-126 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-124 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-124 Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-124 Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-127 Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-123 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-25 Battery ....................................................... 5-51 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-45 Coolant ...................................................... 5-35 Coolant Heater .[...]

  • Page 578

    Fuel ............................................................... 5 - 6 Additives ...................................................... 5 - 7 California Fuel .............................................. 5 - 7 E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................................ 5 - 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-12 Filling Y our T ank .......................................... 5-10 Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5 - 9 Gage ......................................................... 3-50 Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5 - 6 Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5 - 6 Low W arning Light .........[...]

  • Page 579

    Hood Checking Things Under ................................ 5-12 Release ..................................................... 5-13 Horn ............................................................... 3 - 6 How to Use This Manual ...................................... i i How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-17 Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-34 I Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-20 Infants and Y oung Children, Restraints ............... 1-33 Inflation -- T ire Pressure .................................. 5-80 Instrument Panel Overview ..................................................... 3 - 4 Instrument P[...]

  • Page 580

    Light (cont.) T ow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-49 T raction Of f ................................................ 3-42 Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-40 Lighting Entry ......................................................... 3-17 Exit ........................................................... 3-17 Loading Y our V ehicle ....................................... 4-48 Locking Rear Axle ........................................... 4-12 Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-12 Locks Delayed Locking ........................................... 2 - 9 Door ..........................................................[...]

  • Page 581

    Mirrors (cont.) Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar ® , Compass and T emperature Display ............. 2-58 Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-56 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-68 Outside Camper-T ype Mirrors ........................ 2-65 Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-68 Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors ................... 2-68 Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-68 Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-64 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-67 Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-66 Outside West Coast-T ype Mirrors ...................[...]

  • Page 582

    P Park (P) Shifting Into ................................................ 2-50 Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-52 Parking Brake ........................................................ 2-49 Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-53 Parking Y our V ehicle ....................................... 2-53 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-36 Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-80 Passing ......................................................... 4-15 Passlock ® ...................................................... 2-19 Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .................... 4-61 Power Accessory Outlet(s) [...]

  • Page 583

    Rearview Mirror , Automatic Dimming with OnStar ® and Compass ................................. 2-56 Rearview Mirror , Automatic Dimming with OnStar ® , Compass and T emperature Display . . . 2-58 Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-56 Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1 - 6 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-14 Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-47 Recreational V ehicle T owing ............................. 4-62 Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2 - 4 Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2 - 5 Removing the Flat T ire and Installing the Spare T ire [...]

  • Page 584

    Securing a Child Restraint Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-56 Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-54 Right Front Seat Position (Crew Cab) ............. 1-57 Right Front Seat Position (Regular and Extended Cab) ................................ 1-60, 1-65 Security Light ................................................. 3-48 Service ........................................................... 5 - 4 Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5 - 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Y our V ehicle ..................................................... 5- 5 California Proposition 65 W arning .................... 5 - 4 Doing Y our Own Wo[...]

  • Page 585

    Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels, Cleaning ............................................... 5-119 Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-86 Chains ....................................................... 5-91 Changing a Flat T ire .................................... 5-92 Cleaning ................................................... 5-120 Different Size .............................................. 5-87 Dual T ire Operation ..................................... 5-82 If a T ire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-92 Inflation -- T ire Pressure ............................... 5-80 Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-82 Installing the S[...]

  • Page 586

    V V ehicle Control ........................................................ 4 - 6 Damage W arnings ........................................... i v Loading ...................................................... 4-48 Parking Y our ............................................... 2-53 Symbols ......................................................... i v V ehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-64 V ehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders .................................................... 7 - 9 V ehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-122 Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-123 V ehicle Personalization [...]